WO2014112556A1 - Method for producing color filter - Google Patents

Method for producing color filter Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014112556A1
WO2014112556A1 PCT/JP2014/050676 JP2014050676W WO2014112556A1 WO 2014112556 A1 WO2014112556 A1 WO 2014112556A1 JP 2014050676 W JP2014050676 W JP 2014050676W WO 2014112556 A1 WO2014112556 A1 WO 2014112556A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
cured film
compound
etching
groups
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/050676
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
高桑 英希
光司 吉林
嶋田 和人
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to KR1020157018152A priority Critical patent/KR101678473B1/en
Publication of WO2014112556A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014112556A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/201Filters in the form of arrays
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A44HABERDASHERY; JEWELLERY
    • A44BBUTTONS, PINS, BUCKLES, SLIDE FASTENERS, OR THE LIKE
    • A44B19/00Slide fasteners
    • A44B19/24Details
    • A44B19/36Means for permanently uniting the stringers at the end; Means for stopping movement of slider at the end
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A44HABERDASHERY; JEWELLERY
    • A44BBUTTONS, PINS, BUCKLES, SLIDE FASTENERS, OR THE LIKE
    • A44B19/00Slide fasteners
    • A44B19/42Making by processes not fully provided for in one other class, e.g. B21D53/50, B21F45/18, B22D17/16, B29D5/00
    • A44B19/60Applying end stops upon stringer tapes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a color filter, and more particularly to a method for manufacturing a color filter using a dry etching method.
  • a dry etching method is known as a method that is effective for forming a fine pattern with a thinner film than a manufacturing method of a color filter using a photolithography method.
  • the dry etching method has been conventionally employed as a method of forming a pattern on a dye-deposited thin film, and various methods have been proposed.
  • Patent Document 1 it is proposed to use a stopper layer made of metal in order to prevent even a part of the support in the region from which the colored layer has been removed from being cut and a step is generated. Yes.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a color filter in which peeling of the color filter in the resist pattern removing step is suppressed.
  • the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by providing a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on a support. Completed the invention. That is, the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
  • a cured film forming step of forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on a support A colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer on the cured film; A photoresist layer forming step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer; A pattern forming step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer in a pattern-like manner; Using the resist pattern as an etching mask, an etching process for etching the colored layer by a dry etching method using an etching gas; And a resist pattern removing step of removing a resist pattern remaining after the etching step.
  • the cured film forming step is a step of forming a cured film using a composition for forming a cured film including at least a metal oxide particle and a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule.
  • (1)-(5) The manufacturing method of the color filter in any one of (5).
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a solid-state imaging device in which a color filter according to the present invention is used. Sectional drawing which showed the manufacturing method of the color filter of this invention.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a solid-state imaging device.
  • an n-type solid-state imaging device 3 and an n-type transfer channel 4 are formed on the surface of a semiconductor substrate 2 in which a p-type well layer is formed on an n-type substrate.
  • a transfer electrode 5 is formed above the transfer channel 4 via an insulating film made of silicon oxide or the like.
  • the transfer electrode 5 is formed of W (tungsten) or the like, and is covered with a light shielding film having an opening above the solid-state imaging device 3.
  • a reflowed BPSG film 6 is formed on the transfer electrode 5 covered with the light shielding film by an atmospheric pressure CVD method.
  • the BPSG film 6 has a shape of a downward convex lens.
  • an inner lens 7 is formed by plasma CVD of SiN having a high refractive index and high transparency.
  • a planarizing layer 10 formed of an organic resin film, a BPSG film, a silicon oxide insulating film, or the like is formed above the in-layer lens 7, a planarizing layer 10 formed of an organic resin film, a BPSG film, a silicon oxide insulating film, or the like is formed.
  • a color filter 8 composed of the three primary colors red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is formed.
  • a microlens 9 is formed of a photoresist material.
  • the solid-state imaging device 1 has such a configuration, and light of each color is extracted when light incident from the microlens 9 passes through the color filter 8, and the light of each color collected by the in-layer lens 7 is solid-state imaging device. 3 is converted into an electric signal.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a color filter manufacturing method.
  • the method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a cured film forming step of forming a cured film on a support, a colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer on the cured film, and a photoresist layer on the colored layer.
  • a resist pattern removing (peeling) step of removing the pattern will be described in detail.
  • the cured film forming step is a step of forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on the support. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the primary particle diameter is 1 nm to 100 nm on the planarizing layer 10 of the substrate 1a as the support formed up to the planarizing layer 10. A cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles is formed. In FIG. 2B, the cured film 20 is formed on the planarizing layer 10, but the planarized layer 10 itself may be the cured film.
  • the support and the material contained in the cured film will be described in detail, and the procedure of the subsequent process will be described in detail.
  • the substrate 1a serving as a support is not particularly limited as long as a color filter is used, and examples thereof include a photoelectric conversion element substrate used for a solid-state imaging element, such as a silicon substrate, an oxide film, and silicon nitride. . Further, other layers such as an intermediate layer may be provided between the support and the colored layer as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • the primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles contained in the cured film is 1 to 100 nm. Among these, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film and stability over time of the curable composition, 5 to 80 nm is preferable, and 10 to 70 nm is more preferable.
  • the primary particle diameter is less than 1 nm, the temporal stability of the curable composition is deteriorated, and the color filter is peeled off from the support when the resist pattern is removed.
  • the thickness exceeds 100 nm the transparency of the cured film decreases due to light scattering, and the color filter peels off from the support when the resist pattern is removed.
  • the primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles is an average value.
  • the measurement method is to observe the cross section of the cured film with an electron microscope and measure the primary particle diameter (diameter) of at least 20 metal oxide particles. Find them by arithmetic averaging. In addition, when a metal oxide particle is not spherical, the major axis is handled as a diameter. As will be described later, when a composition for forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles is used, the primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles in the composition is determined by a known device (for example, Nikkiso Microtrac UPA-EX150 (dynamic It can be measured and determined by the automatic light scattering method)).
  • the type of metal atom contained in the metal oxide particle is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a metal atom selected from the group consisting of the fourth period, the fifth period, and the sixth period of the periodic table (IUPAC 1991). preferable. Further, it is preferable to contain one or more metals selected from the group consisting of Groups 2 to 14, and Group 2, Group 8, Group 9, Group 10, Group 11, Group 12 are preferably contained. More preferably, it contains a metal atom selected from the group consisting of Group, Group 13, and Group 14.
  • metal oxide particles include titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, zinc oxide, and aluminum oxide.
  • the colorless or transparent titanium dioxide particles can be represented by the chemical formula TiO 2 , preferably have a purity of 70% or more, more preferably have a purity of 80% or more, and further have a purity of 85% or more. preferable.
  • the low-order titanium oxide, titanium oxynitride, etc. represented by the general formula Ti n O 2n-1 (n represents a number of 2 to 4) is 30% by mass or less based on the total mass of the particles. Is preferable, it is more preferable that it is 20 mass% or less, and it is still more preferable that it is 15 mass% or less.
  • crystallization is preferable.
  • the refractive index of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.75 to 2.70, more preferably 1.90 to 2.70 from the viewpoint of obtaining a high refractive index.
  • This refractive index can be measured with an Abbe refractometer (manufactured by Atago Co., Ltd.) (measurement temperature 25 ° C., wavelength 633 nm).
  • the specific surface area of the metal oxide particles is preferably 10 m 2 / g to 400 m 2 / g, more preferably 20 m 2 / g to 200 m 2 / g, and 30 m 2 / g to 150 m 2 / g. Most preferably.
  • limiting in particular in the shape of a metal oxide particle for example, it can be a rice grain shape, a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a spindle shape, or an indefinite shape.
  • the metal oxide particles may have been surface-treated with an organic compound.
  • organic compound used for the surface treatment include polyols, alkanolamines, stearic acid, silane coupling agents, and titanate coupling agents. Of these, stearic acid is preferred.
  • the surface treatment may be carried out by using a single surface treatment agent or a combination of two or more surface treatment agents. It is also preferable that the surface of the metal oxide particles is treated with an oxide such as aluminum, silicon, or zirconia. Thereby, a weather resistance improves.
  • titanium dioxide particles As a metal oxide particle, what is marketed can be used preferably.
  • examples of commercially available titanium dioxide particles include TTO series (TTO-51 (A), TTO-51 (C), TTO-55 (C), etc.), TTO-S, V series (made by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.). And TTO-S-1, TTO-S-2, TTO-V-3, etc.) and MT series (MT-01, MT-05, etc.) manufactured by Teika Corporation.
  • zirconium dioxide particles examples include UEP (Daiichi Rare Element Chemical Co., Ltd.), PCS (Nippon Denko Co., Ltd.), JS-01, JS-03, JS-04 (Nippon Denko ( And UEP-100 (Daiichi Rare Element Chemical Industries, Ltd.).
  • Examples of commercially available silicon dioxide particles include OG502-31 manufactured by Clariant Co. The metal oxide particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the metal oxide particles in the cured film is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the cured film in terms of further suppressing peeling of the color filter. Is more preferable. In particular, 50 to 77% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 75% by mass is particularly preferable in that peeling of the color filter is further suppressed.
  • the thickness of the cured film is not particularly limited, and is preferably from 5 to 500 nm, more preferably from 20 to 450 nm, and even more preferably from 50 to 400 nm, from the viewpoint of further suppressing peeling of the color filter.
  • the cured film preferably has a refractive index of 1.85 to 2.60, more preferably 1.90 to 2.60, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the color filter.
  • the physical property that the refractive index of the cured film is 1.85 to 2.60 can be suitably achieved by containing a polymer dispersant (B) described later, but it can be achieved by any means. Good. For example, it can be achieved more reliably by adjusting the type and content of the polymerizable compound (C) described later and the binder polymer that can be further added, and adjusting the type and content of the metal oxide particles. .
  • the manufacturing method in particular of a cured film is not restrict
  • a method of applying the cured film-forming composition containing the metal oxide particles described above onto a support and performing a curing treatment (for example, a heat treatment and / or an exposure treatment) as necessary can be employed.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a spray method, a roll coating method, a spin coating method (spin coating method), and a bar coating method.
  • components other than metal oxide particles may be contained in the composition for forming a cured film as described later.
  • a polymer dispersant, a polymerizable compound, a solvent and the like which will be described later are included.
  • the cured film forming composition is preferably a transparent composition. More specifically, when a cured film having a thickness of 1.0 ⁇ m is formed from the composition, light transmission in the thickness direction of the cured film is achieved. It is preferable that the composition has a rate of 90% or more over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm. That is, the cured film (transparent film) is preferably a film having a light transmittance of 90% or more over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm when the film thickness is 1.0 ⁇ m. Such physical properties of light transmittance may be achieved by any means.
  • the light transmittance is preferably 95% or more, more preferably 99% or more, and most preferably 100% over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm. It is preferable that the composition for forming a cured film does not substantially contain a colorant. More specifically, the content of the colorant is preferably 0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • Components other than the metal oxide particles described above may be contained in the cured film or the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the cured film preferably contains the (B) polymer dispersant, (I) binder polymer, (J) surfactant, and the like.
  • the cured film may contain a polymer dispersant.
  • a method of making a cured film contain a polymer dispersing agent there exists the method of containing a polymeric dispersant in the composition for cured film formation mentioned above.
  • the type of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited.
  • a general polymer dispersant (hereinafter also referred to as a dispersion resin as appropriate) [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight Saturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic copolymer, naphthalene sulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, etc. be able to.
  • These dispersion resins can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
  • the dispersion resin is adsorbed on the surface of the metal oxide particles and acts to prevent reaggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer having an anchor site to the surface of the metal oxide particles can be cited as preferred structures. On the other hand, the dispersion resin has an effect of promoting adsorption of the dispersion resin by modifying the surface of the metal oxide particles.
  • dispersion resin examples include “DISPERBYK101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110, 180 (copolymer containing an acid group), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, manufactured by BYK Chemie.
  • the basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a basic nitrogen atom, but the resin (B1) preferably contains a structure having a nitrogen atom of pKb14 or less, and a structure having a nitrogen atom of pKb10 or less.
  • the base strength pKb refers to pKb at a water temperature of 25 ° C., and is one of the indexes for quantitatively representing the strength of the base, and is synonymous with the basicity constant.
  • the resin (B1) is a resin having a repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom to which a group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less is bonded, and an oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms in the side chain ( B2) is preferred.
  • Resin (B1) is composed of (i) a poly (lower alkyleneimine) -based repeating unit, a polyallylamine-based repeating unit, a polydiallylamine-based repeating unit, a metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating unit, and a polyvinylamine-based repeating unit.
  • At least one selected repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom the repeating unit having a group X bonded to the nitrogen atom and having a functional group of pKa14 or less, and (ii) 40 atoms in the side chain
  • a resin having ⁇ 10,000 oligomer chains or polymer chains Y (hereinafter appropriately referred to as “specific resin”) is particularly preferable.
  • specific resin preferably includes a structure having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-1) and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-2).
  • R 101 and R 102 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • a independently represents an integer of 1 to 5; * Represents a connecting part between repeating units.
  • X represents a group having a functional group of pKa14 or less.
  • Y represents an oligomer chain or a polymer chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms.
  • the specific resin of the present invention comprises a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-1) or (I-2). It is preferable to have as. By using such a repeating unit in combination, the dispersion performance is further improved when this resin is used as a dispersant for the metal oxide particles (A).
  • Y ′ represents an oligomer chain or polymer chain having an anion group and having 40 to 10,000 atoms.
  • the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) is obtained by adding an oligomer or polymer having a group that reacts with an amine to form a salt to a resin having a primary or secondary amino group in the main chain portion. It can be formed by reacting.
  • the anionic group CO 2 - or SO 3 - is preferable, and CO 2 - is most preferable.
  • the anionic group is preferably at the terminal position of the oligomer chain or polymer chain of Y ′.
  • R 101 and R 102 are particularly preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • a is preferably 2 from the viewpoint of obtaining raw materials.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (I-1) is preferably 1 to 80 mol% in all repeating units contained in the specific resin from the viewpoint of storage stability and developability, and 3 to 50 mol. % Is most preferred.
  • the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (I-2) is preferably 10 to 90 mol%, and most preferably 30 to 70 mol%, based on all repeating units of the specific resin.
  • the repeating unit (I-1) :( I-2) is in the range of 10: 1 to 1: 100 in molar ratio. Preferably, the range is from 1: 1 to 1:10.
  • the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) used in combination optionally has a partial structure containing an oligomer chain or a polymer chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms ionically bonded to the nitrogen atom of the main chain.
  • the content is preferably 0.5 to 20 mol%, and most preferably 1 to 10 mol% in all repeating units of the specific resin.
  • the group X has a functional group having a pKa of 14 or less at a water temperature of 25 ° C.
  • pKa has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
  • the “functional group of pKa14 or less” is not particularly limited as long as the physical properties satisfy this condition, and examples thereof include those having a pKa satisfying the above range with known functional groups.
  • the following functional groups are preferred, and those having a pKa of 11 or less are most preferred.
  • carboxylic acid about pKa 3 to 5
  • sulfonic acid about pKa -3 to -2
  • phosphonic acid about pKa -1 to 4
  • -COCH 2 CO- about
  • —COCH 2 CN about pKa 8 to 11
  • CONHCO— phenolic hydroxyl group
  • RFCH 2 OH or — (RF) 2 CHOH RF represents a perfluoroalkyl group
  • RF represents a perfluoroalkyl group
  • pKa 9 to 11 Sulfonamide groups
  • pKa of about 9 to 11 and the like
  • carboxylic acid pKa of about 3 to 5
  • sulfonic acid pKa of about 3 to -2
  • —COCH 2 CO— pKa of about 8 to 10
  • the group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less is preferably directly bonded to the nitrogen atom in the repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom. However, if the nitrogen atom and X in the repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom are only covalent bonds, Instead, they may be linked in such a manner that a salt is formed by ionic bonding.
  • group X containing a functional group of pKa14 or less in the present invention those having a structure represented by general formula (V-1), general formula (V-2) or general formula (V-3) are particularly preferable. .
  • U represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • d and e each independently represents 0 or 1;
  • Q represents an acyl group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • Examples of the divalent linking group represented by U include an alkylene group (more specifically, for example, —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CHMe—, — (CH 2 ) 5 -, -CH 2 CH (n-C 10 H 21 )-, etc.), an alkylene group containing oxygen (more specifically, for example, -CH 2 OCH 2- , -CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2- Etc.), arylene groups (for example, phenylene group, tolylene group, biphenylene group, naphthylene group, furylene group, pyrrolylene group, etc.), alkyleneoxy groups (for example, ethyleneoxy group, propyleneoxy group, phenyleneoxy group, etc.)
  • an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 15 carbon
  • Q represents an acyl group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • the acyl group in Q is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a formyl group, an acetyl group, an n-propanoyl group, a benzoyl group), and particularly preferably acetyl.
  • the alkoxycarbonyl group in Q is preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, an n-propoxycarbonyl group, etc.).
  • Q is particularly preferably an acyl group, and an acetyl group is preferred from the viewpoint of ease of production and availability of raw materials.
  • oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms examples include known polymer chains such as polyester, polyamide, polyimide, and poly (meth) acrylate that can be connected to the main chain portion of the specific resin.
  • the binding site of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y with the specific resin is preferably the terminal of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y.
  • the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is selected from poly (lower alkylene imine) -based repeating units, polyallylamine-based repeating units, polydiallylamine-based repeating units, metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating units, and polyvinylamine-based repeating units. It is preferably bonded to a nitrogen atom of a repeating unit containing at least one nitrogen atom.
  • At least one nitrogen atom selected from a poly (lower alkyleneimine) -based repeating unit, a polyallylamine-based repeating unit, a polydiallylamine-based repeating unit, a metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating unit, and a polyvinylamine-based repeating unit
  • the bonding mode between the main chain portion such as a repeating unit containing benzene and the oligomer chain or the polymer chain Y is a covalent bond, an ionic bond, or a mixture of a covalent bond and an ionic bond.
  • the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is preferably ionically bonded as a amide bond or carboxylate with a nitrogen atom of a repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom.
  • the number of atoms of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is preferably 50 to 5,000, more preferably 60 to 3,000, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, dispersion stability, and developability. Further, the number average molecular weight of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y can be measured by a polystyrene conversion value by GPC method. The number average molecular weight of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is particularly preferably 1,000 to 50,000, and most preferably 1,000 to 30,000 from the viewpoint of dispersibility, dispersion stability, and developability.
  • the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y preferably has a structure represented by the general formula (III-1).
  • Y ′ is preferably the general formula (III-2).
  • Z has the same meaning as Z in general formula (III-1).
  • Specific examples of the specific resin include resins exemplified in paragraphs [0075] to [0084] of JP2012-255148A.
  • polymer dispersant includes a polymer compound represented by the following general formula (1) having a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less.
  • R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group.
  • R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a 1 is a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a heterocyclic group (a group having a heterocyclic structure), an alkyloxycarbonyl group
  • a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of alkylaminocarbonyl group, imide group, carboxylate group, sulfonamido group, alkoxysilyl group, epoxy group, isocyanate group and hydroxyl group (hereinafter simply Represents the substituent A 1 ).
  • n A 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
  • m represents a positive number of 8 or less, n represents 1 to 9, and m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
  • P 1 represents a polymer chain.
  • the m P 1 may be the same or different.
  • the polymer compound Since the substituent A 1 possessed by the polymer compound can interact with the metal oxide particles, the polymer compound has n (1 to 9) substituents A 1 to form the metal oxide particles. Can interact strongly.
  • m polymer chains P 1 of the polymer compound can function as a steric repulsion group, and by having the m number, the polymer compound can exhibit a favorable steric repulsion force and uniformly disperse the metal oxide particles. .
  • the high molecular compound does not cause adverse effects such as aggregation of particles due to cross-linking between particles, which can be generated by a conventional dispersant having a graft random structure.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) is 10,000 or less, and preferably 8000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight is too large, the particle size of the metal oxide particle (A) -polymer dispersant (B) complex in the dispersion composition (cured film forming composition) becomes large, and the particles in the resulting film It is considered that it is difficult to increase the refractive index because they are not dense. On the other hand, by setting the weight average molecular weight within the above range, the particle size of the metal oxide particle (A) -polymer dispersant (B) complex can be kept small, and the particles in the resulting film become dense, It is considered that the refractive index can be increased.
  • the lower limit of the weight average molecular weight is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1000 or more from the viewpoint of exhibiting the function as a dispersant and more reliably achieving the effects of the present invention. More preferably.
  • a 1 is a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, an imide group, a carboxylate group , Sulfonamide group, alkoxysilyl group, epoxy group, isocyanate group, functional group having adsorption ability for metal oxide particles (A) such as hydroxyl group, adsorption ability for metal oxide particles (A) such as heterocyclic structure Represents a monovalent substituent having at least one structure which may have
  • the site having the ability to adsorb to the metal oxide particles (A) (the functional group and the structure) will be collectively referred to as “adsorption site” as appropriate.
  • a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched and has 1 to 10 carbon atoms) 2) or more, via a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group) or the like.
  • a 1 An embodiment in which the adsorption site is bonded to form a monovalent substituent A 1 is exemplified, and an embodiment in which two or more adsorption sites are bonded through a chain saturated hydrocarbon group to form a monovalent substituent A 1 Is preferred.
  • the adsorption site itself constitutes a monovalent substituent the adsorption site itself may be a monovalent substituent represented by A 1 .
  • the adsorption site constituting A 1 will be described below.
  • hydrocarbon group includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Of these, a group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the “acidic group” include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, and a boric acid group.
  • Sulfuric acid ester groups, phosphoric acid groups, monophosphoric acid ester groups, phosphonic acid groups, and phosphinic acid groups are more preferred, carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, phosphonic acid groups, and phosphinic acid groups are more preferred, and carboxylic acid groups. Is particularly preferred.
  • Examples of the “urea group” include —NR 15 CONR 16 R 17 (where R 15 , R 16 , and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number of 6 The above aryl group or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms may be mentioned as a preferred example, and —NR 15 CONHR 17 (wherein R 15 and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, 1 carbon atom) More preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), and —NHCONHR 17 (wherein R 17 represents a hydrogen atom, An alkyl group of up to 10, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
  • Examples of the “urethane group” include —NHCOOR 18 , —NR 19 COOR 20 , —OCONHR 21 , —OCONR 22 R 23 (where R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 and R 23 are And each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.) And the like, and —NHCOOR 18 , —OCONHR 21 ( Here, R 18 and R 21 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • NHCOOR 18, -OCONHR 21 (wherein, R 18 and R 21 are each independently an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having 6 or more aryl group carbon atoms or the number of 7 or more a carbon It represents an alkyl group.) And the like are particularly preferred.
  • Examples of the “group having a coordinating oxygen atom” include acetylacetonato group, crown ether and the like.
  • Examples of the “group having a basic nitrogen atom” include an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 Each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), a guanidyl group represented by the following formula (a1), Preferred examples include an amidinyl group represented by the following formula (a2).
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 each independently represent from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Represents an alkyl group, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group.
  • an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • Group, a phenyl group or a benzyl group a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Represents a group, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group.
  • R 13 and R 14 each independently represent an alkyl group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. Etc. are preferably used.
  • the alkyl group moiety in the “alkyloxycarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group and an ethyl group.
  • the alkyl group moiety in the “alkylaminocarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group.
  • Examples of the “carboxylic acid group” include groups composed of ammonium salts of carboxylic acids.
  • a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom may be substituted with an alkyl group (such as a methyl group) or an acyl group (such as an acetyl group or a trifluoroacetyl group).
  • heterocyclic structure examples include, for example, thiophene, furan, xanthene, pyrrole, pyrroline, pyrrolidine, dioxolane, pyrazole, pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, oxadiazole, triazole, thiadiazole, pyran, pyridine, piperidine , Imide groups such as dioxane, morpholine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, triazine, trithiane, isoindoline, isoindolinone, benzimidazolone, benzothiazole, succinimide, phthalimide, naphthalimide, hydantoin, indole, quinoline, carbazole, acridine, Preferred examples include acridone and anthraquinone, and pyrroline, pyrrolidine, diox
  • the “heterocyclic structure” may further have a substituent.
  • substituents include alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, and acetoxy groups, methoxy groups, and ethoxy groups
  • An alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a halogen atom such as chlorine or bromine, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, or a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, t- Examples thereof include carbonate ester groups such as butyl carbonate.
  • these substituents may be bonded to the heterocyclic ring through the following structural unit or a linking group constituted by combining the structural units.
  • alkoxysilyl group may be any of monoalkoxysilyl group, dialkoxysilyl group and trialkoxysilyl group, but is preferably trialkoxysilyl group, for example, trimethoxysilyl group, triethoxysilyl group Etc.
  • epoxy group include a substituted or unsubstituted oxirane group (ethylene oxide group).
  • As an epoxy group it can represent with the following general formula (a3), for example.
  • R EP1 to R EP3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
  • R EP1 and R EP2 , R EP2 and R EP3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. * Represents a connecting hand.
  • the linking group bonded to the adsorption site may be a single bond or 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200. And a linking group consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms is preferred, and this organic linking group may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent. Specific examples of this linking group include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units.
  • examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, and a carbon group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • C1-C6 alkoxy such as aryl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamide group, N-sulfonylamide group, acetoxy group, etc.
  • C1-C6 acyloxy group methoxy group, ethoxy group, etc.
  • halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine
  • alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group
  • carbonate groups such as cyano group and t-butyl carbonate, etc. It is done.
  • a 1 a monovalent substitution having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group and a group having a coordinating oxygen atom It is preferably a group.
  • a 1 is a monovalent having at least one functional group of pKa5 or higher.
  • a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 to 14 is more preferable.
  • pKa has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
  • the functional group of pKa5 or higher include a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group, or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom.
  • a urea group about pKa 12 to 14
  • a urethane group about pKa 11 to 13
  • —COCH 2 CO— about pKa 8 to 10
  • Examples thereof include a sulfonamide group (about pKa 9 to 11).
  • a 1 is preferably represented as a monovalent substituent represented by the following general formula (4).
  • B 1 represents an adsorption site
  • R 24 represents a single bond or a (a + 1) -valent linking group.
  • a represents an integer of 1 to 10, and B 1 existing in the general formula (4) may be the same or different.
  • Examples of the adsorption site represented by B 1 include the same adsorption sites as those constituting A 1 in the general formula (1), and preferred examples are also the same. Among them, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom is preferable, and a urea group, a functional group having a pKa of 5 to 14 is more preferable. It is more preferably a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom.
  • R 24 represents a single bond or a (a + 1) -valent linking group, and a represents 1 to 10.
  • a is 1 to 7, more preferably a is 1 to 5, and particularly preferably a is 1 to 3.
  • (A + 1) valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included and may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • (a + 1) -valent linking group examples include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units (which may form a ring structure).
  • R 24 may be a single bond or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 25 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms, and (A + 1) valent linking groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, single bonds or 1 to 30 carbon atoms, 0 to 6 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 15 More preferred are (a + 1) valent linking groups consisting of up to oxygen atoms, 1 to 50 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, a single bond, or 1 to 10 carbons (A + 1) valent linkage consisting of atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms The group is particularly preferred.
  • examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, acetoxy groups, etc., carbon atoms such as methoxy groups, ethoxy groups, etc.
  • R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the n R 2 s may be the same or different.
  • Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
  • divalent linking group examples include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units.
  • R 2 may be a single bond or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 25 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms, and Divalent linking groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, single bonds, or 1 to 30 carbon atoms, 0 to 6 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 15 More preferred are divalent linking groups consisting of oxygen atoms, 1 to 50 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, a single bond or 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 Particularly preferred are divalent linking groups consisting of from 1 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms.
  • examples of the substituent include carbon numbers such as an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as aryl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamido group, N-sulfonylamido group, acetoxy group, etc. having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, methoxy group, ethoxy group, etc.
  • alkoxy groups such as chlorine and bromine, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, carbonic acid such as t-butyl carbonate, etc.
  • An ester group etc. are mentioned.
  • R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group.
  • m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
  • Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 200. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
  • (m + n) -valent linking group examples include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units (which may form a ring structure).
  • (M + n) -valent linking groups include 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 40 oxygen atoms, 1 to 120 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 30 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 And more preferably a group consisting of 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, 1 to 40 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 20 oxygen atoms, Particular preference is given to groups consisting of 1 to 80 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms.
  • examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, acetoxy groups, etc., carbon atoms such as methoxy groups, ethoxy groups, etc.
  • the most preferable (m + n) -valent linking group is the following group from the viewpoint of availability of raw materials, ease of synthesis, and solubility in various solvents.
  • n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and particularly preferably 3 to 6.
  • P 1 represents a polymer chain and can be selected from known polymers according to the purpose.
  • the m P 1 may be the same or different.
  • the polymers a vinyl monomer polymer or copolymer, an ester polymer, an ether polymer, a urethane polymer, an amide polymer, an epoxy polymer, a silicone polymer, and modifications thereof are used to form a polymer chain.
  • copolymer for example, polyether / polyurethane copolymer, copolymer of polyether / vinyl monomer polymer, etc. (any of random copolymer, block copolymer, graft copolymer, etc. May also be included).
  • At least one selected from the group consisting of vinyl monomers selected from the group consisting of polymers or copolymers of vinyl monomers, ester polymers, ether polymers, urethane polymers, and modified products or copolymers thereof. At least one kind is more preferred, and a polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomers is particularly preferred.
  • the polymer chain P 1 preferably contains at least one repeating unit.
  • the number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit in the polymer chain P 1 is preferably 3 or more from the viewpoint of achieving steric repulsion and improving dispersibility, achieving a high refractive index and a low viscosity. More preferably, it is 5 or more. From the viewpoint of suppressing the bulk of the polymer dispersant (B) and achieving a low viscosity, and further allowing the metal oxide particles (A) to be present in the cured film (transparent film) densely to achieve a high refractive index.
  • the number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
  • the polymer constituting the polymer chain is preferably soluble in an organic solvent.
  • the affinity with the organic solvent is low, the affinity with the dispersion medium is weakened, and it may be impossible to secure an adsorption layer sufficient for stabilizing the dispersion.
  • vinyl monomer For example, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, vinyl monomers having an acid group, maleic acid diesters, fumaric acid diesters, itaconic acid diesters , (Meth) acrylamides, styrenes, vinyl ethers, vinyl ketones, olefins, maleimides, (meth) acrylonitrile, etc.
  • (meth) acrylic acid esters are preferred, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, acid groups More preferred are vinyl monomers having a (meth) acrylic acid ester and crotonic acid ester.
  • vinyl monomers include the vinyl monomers described in paragraphs 0089 to 0094, 0096, and 0097 of JP-A-2007-277514 (corresponding US publication: US2010 / 233595 A1). Is incorporated herein.
  • vinyl monomers having a functional group such as a urethane group, a urea group, a sulfonamide group, a phenol group, and an imide group can also be used.
  • a monomer having a urethane group or a urea group can be appropriately synthesized using, for example, an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxyl group or an amino group.
  • an addition reaction between an isocyanate group-containing monomer and a compound containing one hydroxyl group or a compound containing one primary or secondary amino group, or a hydroxyl group-containing monomer or primary or secondary amino group containing It can be appropriately synthesized by an addition reaction between a monomer and monoisocyanate.
  • Examples of the vinyl monomer having an acidic group include a vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group and a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group.
  • Examples of the vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer.
  • an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used.
  • a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ⁇ -carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates
  • anhydride containing monomers such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxyl group.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferred from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, and the like.
  • Examples of the vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group include 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and examples of the vinyl monomer having a phosphoric acid group include phosphoric acid mono (2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and phosphoric acid mono (1-methyl-2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and the like.
  • vinyl monomer having an acidic group a vinyl monomer containing a phenolic hydroxyl group, a vinyl monomer containing a sulfonamide group, or the like can be used.
  • the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (2) is preferable.
  • a 2 represents a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, or an alkylaminocarbonyl group.
  • a 2 may be the same or different.
  • a 2 has the same meaning as above A 1 in the general formula (1), a preferable embodiment thereof is also the same.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the n R 4 s may be the same or different.
  • the m R 5 s may be the same or different.
  • the divalent linking group represented by R 4 or R 5 the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 2 in the general formula (1) can be used, and a preferred embodiment is also used. It is the same.
  • R 3 represents an (m + n) -valent linking group.
  • m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
  • Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 include 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 100 atoms. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
  • the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 those similar to those exemplified as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (1) are used. The preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and particularly preferably 3 to 6.
  • P 2 of the general formula (2) represents a polymer chain, can be selected according to the purpose or the like from such known polymers.
  • the m P 2 may be the same or different.
  • the preferred embodiment of the polymer is the same as P 1 in the general formula (1).
  • R 3 Specific example (1), (2), (10), (11), (16), or (17) above
  • R 4 A single bond or the following structural unit or a combination of the structural units: “1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 carbon atoms”
  • a divalent linking group comprising an oxygen atom, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms (which may have a substituent, for example, Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as methyl group and ethyl group, aryl groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms such as phenyl group and naphthyl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamide group, N-sulfonylamide Groups, acyloxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as
  • R 5 single bond, ethylene group, propylene group, the following group (a), or the following group (b)
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • l represents 1 or 2.
  • P 2 Polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomer, ester polymer, ether polymer, urethane polymer and modified products thereof m: 1 to 3 n: 3-6
  • the acid value of the polymer dispersant (B) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of viscosity or dispersibility, the acid value is preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, and 250 mgKOH. / G or less is particularly preferable.
  • the acid value is preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, and 250 mgKOH. / G or less is particularly preferable.
  • limiting in particular as a lower limit of an acid value From a viewpoint of the dispersion stability of a metal oxide particle, it is preferable that it is 5 mgKOH / g or more, and it is more preferable that it is 10 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the acid value of the polymer dispersant is the solid content acid value of the polymer compound.
  • the acid value of the polymer dispersant can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acidic groups in the polymer dispersant.
  • the acid value of the polymer dispersant can be adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of acid groups in the polymer dispersant and the amount of functional groups of pKa5 to 14 described later.
  • an acidity A polymer dispersant having a desired acid value can be synthesized by appropriately adjusting the amount of the vinyl monomer having a group.
  • the polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) or (2) is not particularly limited, but may be synthesized according to the synthesis method described in paragraphs 0114 to 0140 and 0266 to 0348 of JP-A-2007-277514. Can do. In particular, it is preferable to synthesize a polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) or (2) by radical polymerization of a vinyl monomer in the presence of a mercaptan compound having a plurality of adsorption sites.
  • the above vinyl monomers may be polymerized by only one kind, or may be copolymerized by using two or more kinds in combination.
  • Specific examples (M-1) to (M-13) of vinyl monomers are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • R 6 , R 7 , A 3 , m, and n have the same meanings as R 3 , R 4 , A 2 , m, and n in the general formula (2), respectively. Is the same.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (3) is preferably synthesized by the following method.
  • the addition reaction is a radical addition reaction.
  • the carbon-carbon double bond is more preferably a mono- or di-substituted vinyl group from the viewpoint of reactivity with a mercapto group.
  • Specific examples of the compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule include the following compounds.
  • a compound having an adsorption site and a carbon-carbon double bond (specifically, a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a basic nitrogen atom) Having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a group having an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxysilyl group, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group, and a hydroxyl group
  • the compound having a carbon-carbon double bond is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following.
  • the radical addition reaction product of “a compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule” and “a compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond” is, for example, “A compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule” and “a compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond” are dissolved in a suitable solvent, and a radical generator is prepared here. And adding at about 50 ° C. to 100 ° C. (thiol-ene reaction method).
  • Suitable solvents used in the thiol-ene reaction method include “a compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule”, “having an adsorption site, and a carbon-carbon double bond. It can be arbitrarily selected according to the solubility of the “compound having” and the “radical addition reaction product to be produced”.
  • solvents may be used as a mixture of two or more.
  • radical generators 2,2′-azobis (isobutyronitrile) (AIBN), 2,2′-azobis- (2,4′-dimethylvaleronitrile), dimethyl 2,2′-azobisisobutyrate
  • AIBN 2,2′-azobis (isobutyronitrile)
  • dimethyl 2,2′-azobisisobutyrate An azo compound such as [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.], a peroxide such as benzoyl peroxide, and a persulfate such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate can be used.
  • the polymer compound those obtained by polymerizing these vinyl monomers and the compound represented by the general formula (3) by a known method according to a conventional method are preferable.
  • the compound represented by General formula (3) in this invention functions as a chain transfer agent, and may only be called a "chain transfer agent” hereafter.
  • a method in which these vinyl monomers and a chain transfer agent are dissolved in a suitable solvent, a radical polymerization initiator is added thereto and polymerized in a solution at about 50 ° C. to 220 ° C. (solution polymerization method) Can be obtained using
  • suitable solvents used in the solution polymerization method can be arbitrarily selected according to the monomers used and the solubility of the resulting copolymer.
  • Examples include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, and toluene. These solvents may be used as a mixture of two or more.
  • radical polymerization initiators examples include 2,2′-azobis (isobutyronitrile) (AIBN), 2,2′-azobis- (2,4′-dimethylvaleronitrile), and 2,2′-azobisisobutyric acid.
  • An azo compound such as dimethyl [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.], a peroxide such as benzoyl peroxide, and a persulfate such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate can be used.
  • the content of the polymer dispersant in the cured film is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 to 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the cured film from the viewpoints of dispersibility, high refractive index, and coated surface shape.
  • the range of mass% is more preferable, and the range of 12 to 30 mass% is still more preferable.
  • content of the polymer dispersing agent in the composition for cured film formation is the said range with respect to the total solid of a composition.
  • the composition for forming a cured film preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule as the polymerizable compound.
  • Specific examples of the compound having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule as the polymerizable compound include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy Examples thereof include resins.
  • bisphenol A type epoxy resins include JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003, JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 ( (Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), and the like.
  • JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation
  • EPICLON 830, EPICLON 835 Made by DIC Corporation
  • LCE-21 LCE-21
  • RE-602S Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • phenol novolac type epoxy resins include JER-152, JER-154, JER-157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N -770, EPICLON N-775 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc.
  • cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N -680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), EOCN-1020 (above, made by Nippon Kayaku Co.,
  • ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), JER-1031S (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), and the like. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Aron oxetane OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
  • an addition polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond can also be used, and a compound having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more. It is preferable to use it.
  • a compound having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond preferably two or more. It is preferable to use it.
  • Such compounds are widely known in the technical field, and can be used without particular limitation in the present invention.
  • the composition for forming a cured film preferably further contains a polymerization initiator described later.
  • Such an addition polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond is, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a copolymer thereof. It has the chemical form of Examples of monomers and copolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), and esters and amides thereof.
  • unsaturated carboxylic acids for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • esters and amides thereof for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.
  • an ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound, or an amide of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound is used.
  • an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or unsaturated carboxylic acid amide having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxyl group, an amino group or a mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy, and A dehydration condensation reaction product with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid is also preferably used.
  • a substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or unsaturated carboxylic acid amide having a leaving group such as a halogen group or a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. It is.
  • the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
  • polymerizable compound (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “polymerizable monomer”, “polymerizable monomer”) has at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and has a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group is also preferred.
  • Examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (Meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) iso (Meth) acrylate obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide
  • a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
  • compounds having a fluorene ring and having two or more functional ethylenic groups described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc. Polymers can also be used.
  • JP-A-10-62986 compounds described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof, which are (meth) acrylated after adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol, It can be used as a polymerizable monomer.
  • the polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is preferably a polymerizable monomer represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-6).
  • n is each 0 to 14, and m is 1 to 8, respectively.
  • a plurality of R, T, and Z present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • T is an oxyalkylene group, the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R.
  • At least one of R is a polymerizable group.
  • n is preferably 0 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • m is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
  • R is
  • dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercially available product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercially available product, KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (manufactured by Co., Ltd.) (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Company), and the structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (
  • the polymerizable monomer is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. Therefore, if the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is.
  • the group may be introduced with an acidic group by reacting with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride examples include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
  • the monomer having an acidic group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polyfunctional monomer having an acidic group is preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol.
  • Examples of commercially available products include Aronix series M-305, M-510, and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acidic group is 0.1 to 40 mg-KOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 to 30 mg-KOH / g.
  • the acid value as the entire polyfunctional monomer is within the above range. It is.
  • the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone modified structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone-modified structure in the molecule.
  • trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane Obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohol such as pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ⁇ -caprolactone, Mention may be made of functional (meth) acrylates. Among these, a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone-modified structure represented by the following formula (11) is preferable.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents a number of 1 or 2
  • “*” represents a bond.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • “*” represents a bond.
  • Polyfunctional monomers having such a caprolactone-modified structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone modified structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • polymerizable monomer or the like in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (i) or (ii).
  • each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) —
  • Each y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — in the general formula (i) or the general formula (ii) is a terminal on the oxygen atom side. Is preferred in which X is bonded to X.
  • the compounds represented by the general formula (i) or (ii) may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii) has a ring-opening skeleton by a ring-opening addition reaction of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide with pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol, which is a conventionally known process. It can be synthesized from the step of bonding and the step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with the terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
  • a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative is more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available monomers such as polymerizable monomers represented by the general formulas (i) and (ii) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
  • Examples of the polymerizable monomer include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, and the like. Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Furthermore, as polymerizable monomers, addition polymerizable monomers having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used.
  • a composition for forming a cured film having an excellent photosensitive speed can be obtained.
  • Commercially available products such as polymerizable monomers include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 "(manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA -306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
  • a polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto (SH) groups in the same molecule is also suitable as the polymerizable monomer. Particularly preferred are those represented by the following general formula (I).
  • R 1 is an alkyl group
  • R 2 is an n-valent aliphatic group that may contain atoms other than carbon
  • R 0 is an alkyl group that is not H
  • n represents 2 to 4
  • polyfunctional thiol compound represented by the general formula (I) is specifically exemplified, 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane [formula (II)] having the following structural formula: 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triasian-2,4,6 (1H, 3H5H) -trione [formula (III)], and pentaerythritol tetrakis (3 -Mercaptobutyrate) [formula (IV)] and the like.
  • These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
  • esters examples include, for example, aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231, JP-A-59-5240, and JP-A-59-5241. And those having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-2-226149 and those containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 are preferably used. Furthermore, the ester monomers described above can also be used as a mixture.
  • amide monomers of aliphatic polyvalent amine compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-acrylamide, and 1,6-hexamethylene bis.
  • examples of other preferable amide monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B No. 54-21726.
  • urethane-based addition polymerizable compounds produced by using an addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group are also suitable. Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708.
  • a vinylurethane compound containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer having a hydroxyl group represented by the following formula (V) to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups: Etc.
  • R 7 and R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • urethane acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56- Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent No. 17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 are also suitable.
  • polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238. Can provide a composition for forming a cured film having an excellent photosensitive speed.
  • polyester acrylates examples include polyester acrylates, epoxy resins and (meth) acrylic acid described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191, JP-B-52-30490, and JP-B-52-30490. Mention may be made of polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates obtained by reaction. Further, specific unsaturated compounds described in JP-B-46-43946, JP-B-1-40337, JP-B-1-40336, and vinylphosphonic acid compounds described in JP-A-2-25493 are also included. Can be mentioned. In some cases, a structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 is preferably used. Furthermore, the Japan Adhesion Association magazine vol. 20, no. 7, photocurable monomers and oligomers described on pages 300 to 308 (1984) can also be used.
  • the details of usage methods can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the composition for cured film formation.
  • it is selected from the following viewpoints.
  • a structure having a large unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable.
  • those having three or more functionalities are preferable, and further, different functional numbers and different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrene compound, vinyl ether compound).
  • a method of adjusting both sensitivity and intensity by using a combination of these materials is also effective.
  • polymerizable compounds are important for compatibility and dispersibility with other components (eg, polymerization initiators, metal oxide particles, etc.) contained in the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more other components in combination.
  • a specific structure may be selected for the purpose of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a substrate.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound (C) is preferably in the range of 1% by mass to 40% by mass and preferably in the range of 3% by mass to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a cured film. More preferably, it is more preferably in the range of 5% by mass to 30% by mass. Within this range, the curability is good and preferable without lowering the refractive index.
  • the composition for forming a cured film may contain a solvent.
  • the kind in particular of solvent used is not restrict
  • organic solvents include alcohol solvents (eg, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol), ketone solvents (eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone), aromatic hydrocarbon solvents (eg, toluene, xylene), amide solvents.
  • nitrile solvents eg, acetonitrile, propionitrile
  • ester solvents eg, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate
  • carbonate solvents eg, dimethyl carbonate, diethyl Carbonate
  • ether solvents halogen solvents and the like.
  • Two or more of these solvents may be mixed and used.
  • the composition for forming a cured film further contains a polymerization initiator.
  • a polymerization initiator those known as polymerization initiators described below can be used.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known polymerization initiators.
  • the polymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 500 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 400 nm).
  • polymerization initiator examples include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like.
  • the description after paragraph [0135] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-106268 (corresponding to [0163] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0124824) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Embedded in the book.
  • an oxime compound can also be suitably used as the polymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime initiator include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A 2006-342166.
  • oxime ester compounds examples include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, Journal of Applied Polymer Science (2012) pp. 725-731, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE02 manufactured by BASF
  • oxime ester compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-T-2009-519904 in which oxime is linked to carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, A compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, the triazine skeleton and the oxime skeleton are the same A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained in the molecule, a compound described in JP 2009-221114 A having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source may be used.
  • cyclic oxime compounds described in JP2007-231000A and JP2007-322744A can also be suitably used.
  • cyclic oxime compounds in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
  • the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
  • an oxime compound having a specific substituent described in JP-A-2007-267979 and an oxime compound having a thioaryl group disclosed in JP-A-2009-191061 can be used.
  • an oxime initiator Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, paragraph 0513 (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]) and the following formulas (OX-1), (OX-2) or ( The description of the compound represented by OX-3) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • the oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
  • a known method can be used for the molar extinction coefficient of the compound. Specifically, for example, 0.01 g of an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Carry-5 spctrophotometer) is used with an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of / L.
  • Polymerization initiators may be used in combination of two or more as required.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallyl.
  • Compounds are preferred.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketones
  • Most preferred is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimer, and benzophenone compounds.
  • an oxime compound as the polymerization initiator.
  • stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and it is required to keep the addition amount of a polymerization initiator low. Therefore, considering these points, it is most preferable to use an oxime compound as a polymerization initiator in order to form a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator contained in the cured film forming composition (the total content in the case of 2 or more types) is 0.1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the cured film forming composition. Preferably, it is 0.5 mass% or more and 20 mass% or less, more preferably 1 mass% or more and 15 mass% or less. Within this range, good curability can be obtained.
  • the composition for forming a cured film may contain a sensitizer for the purpose of improving the radical generation efficiency of the polymerization initiator and increasing the photosensitive wavelength.
  • a sensitizer what sensitizes with the electron transfer mechanism or an energy transfer mechanism with respect to the polymerization initiator mentioned above is preferable. Examples of the sensitizer include those described in paragraphs [0228] to [0250] of JP2012-255148A.
  • the composition for forming a cured film preferably further contains a co-sensitizer.
  • the co-sensitizer has functions such as further improving the sensitivity of the polymerization initiator and sensitizer described above to actinic radiation, or suppressing polymerization inhibition of the polymerizable compound by oxygen. Examples of the co-sensitizer include those described in paragraphs [0252] to [0256] of JP2012-255148A.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compounds, N-oxide compounds, piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines, diazonium compounds, and cations
  • Examples include dyes, sulfide group-containing compounds, nitro group-containing compounds, transition metal compounds such as FeCl 3 and CuCl 2 .
  • the phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compound is hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), Selected from the group consisting of 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylphenol (BHT), phenolic resins, and cresol resins It is preferable that it is a compound.
  • N-oxide compounds include 5,5-dimethyl-1-pyrroline N-oxide, 4-methylmorpholine N-oxide, pyridine N-oxide, 4-nitropyridine N-oxide, 3-hydroxypyridine N-oxide, picoline A compound selected from the group consisting of acid N-oxide, nicotinic acid N-oxide, and isonicotinic acid N-oxide is preferred.
  • Piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds include piperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-oxo-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1 -Oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-acetamido-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-maleimide A compound selected from the group consisting of -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical and 4-phosphonoxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical Is preferred.
  • the pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compound is preferably a 3-carboxyproxyl free radical (3-carboxy-2,2,5,5-tetramethylpyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical).
  • N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines are preferably compounds selected from the group consisting of N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine cerium salts and N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salts.
  • the diazonium compound is selected from the group consisting of 4-diazophenyldimethylamine hydrogen sulfate, 4-diazodiphenylamine tetrafluoroborate, and 3-methoxy-4-diazodiphenylamine hexafluorophosphate Is preferred.
  • Suitable polymerization inhibitors are exemplified below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • Examples of phenolic polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplified compounds (P-1) to (P-24).
  • Examples of amine polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (N-1) to (N-7).
  • sulfur polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (S-1) to (S-5).
  • Examples of phosphite polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (R-1) to (R-5).
  • each compound shown below can also be used as a suitable polymerization inhibitor.
  • hydroquinone hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-) are preferable.
  • a preferable addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more and 8 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerization initiator. And most preferably in the range of 0.05 parts by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less.
  • the cured film preferably further contains a binder polymer from the viewpoint of improving the film properties.
  • a binder polymer there exists the method of containing a binder polymer in the composition for cured film formation mentioned above.
  • the binder polymer a linear organic polymer is preferably used.
  • a linear organic polymer a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily.
  • a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is selected to enable water development or weak alkaline water development.
  • the linear organic polymer is selected and used not only as a film forming agent but also according to the use as water, weak alkaline water or an organic solvent developer.
  • a water-soluble organic polymer when used, water development becomes possible.
  • Examples of such a linear organic polymer include radical polymers having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, and JP-B-sho. No. 54-25957, JP-A-54-92723, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, ie, a monomer having a carboxyl group alone or in combination.
  • Polymerized resin acid anhydride monomer alone or copolymerized, acid anhydride unit hydrolyzed, half-esterified or half-amidated, epoxy resin modified with unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and acid anhydride And epoxy acrylate.
  • the monomer having a carboxyl group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxylstyrene.
  • Examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride. It is done.
  • there is an acidic cellulose derivative having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain there is an acidic cellulose derivative having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain.
  • those obtained by adding a cyclic acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group are useful.
  • a monomer other than the above-mentioned monomers can be used as the compound to be copolymerized.
  • examples of other monomers include the following compounds (1) to (12).
  • Vinyl ethers such as ethyl vinyl ether, 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether, hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, propyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, octyl vinyl ether, and phenyl vinyl ether.
  • Vinyl esters such as vinyl acetate, vinyl chloroacetate, vinyl butyrate and vinyl benzoate.
  • Styrenes such as styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, methylstyrene, chloromethylstyrene, and p-acetoxystyrene.
  • Vinyl ketones such as methyl vinyl ketone, ethyl vinyl ketone, propyl vinyl ketone, and phenyl vinyl ketone.
  • Olefins such as ethylene, propylene, isobutylene, butadiene, and isoprene.
  • N-vinylpyrrolidone (10) N-vinylpyrrolidone, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile and the like.
  • Unsaturated imides such as maleimide, N-acryloylacrylamide, N-acetylmethacrylamide, N-propionylmethacrylamide, N- (p-chlorobenzoyl) methacrylamide.
  • a methacrylic acid monomer having a hetero atom bonded to the ⁇ -position For example, compounds described in JP-A-2002-309057, JP-A-2002-311569 and the like can be mentioned.
  • these monomers can be applied to the synthesis of a copolymer by combining them without particular limitation within the scope of the present invention.
  • this invention is not limited to this.
  • the composition ratio of the exemplary compounds shown below is mol%.
  • the binder polymer preferably contains a repeating unit obtained by polymerizing a monomer component essentially comprising a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) (hereinafter also referred to as “ether dimer”).
  • ED general formula
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, but for example, methyl Linear, branched alkyl groups such as ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, t-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, substituted with alicyclic groups such as t-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-e
  • ether dimers include, for example, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di ( n-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) -2,2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (t-butyl) -2,2 '-[Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (t-amyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoe Di (stearyl)
  • dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred.
  • These ether dimers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
  • ether dimer dimer dimer dimer dimer dimer examples include, for example, a monomer for introducing an acidic group, a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, and an epoxy group. Monomers and other copolymerizable monomers other than these may be mentioned. Only 1 type may be used for such a monomer and it may use 2 or more types.
  • Examples of the monomer for introducing an acidic group include monomers having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid and itaconic acid, monomers having a phenolic hydroxyl group such as N-hydroxyphenylmaleimide, maleic anhydride, and anhydride. And monomers having a carboxylic anhydride group such as itaconic acid.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
  • the monomer for introducing an acidic group may be a monomer that can give an acidic group after polymerization, such as a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, Examples thereof include monomers having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and monomers having an isocyanate group such as 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond when using a monomer capable of imparting an acidic group after polymerization, it may be required to perform a treatment for imparting an acidic group after polymerization.
  • the treatment for imparting acidic groups after polymerization varies depending on the type of monomer, and examples thereof include the following treatment.
  • a treatment of adding an acid anhydride such as succinic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride or the like can be mentioned.
  • a monomer having an epoxy group for example, a compound having an amino group and an acidic group such as N-methylaminobenzoic acid or N-methylaminophenol is added, or, for example, (meth) acrylic
  • an acid anhydride such as succinic acid anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic acid anhydride, maleic acid anhydride to the hydroxyl group generated after adding an acid such as an acid
  • a monomer having an isocyanate group for example, a treatment of adding a compound having a hydroxyl group and an acidic group such as 2-hydroxybutyric acid can be mentioned.
  • the content ratio is not particularly limited, In the monomer component, the content is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass.
  • Examples of the monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond include monomers having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid and itaconic acid; and carboxylic acid anhydride groups such as maleic anhydride and itaconic anhydride. Monomers having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and the like. When using a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, it is necessary to perform a treatment for imparting a radical polymerizable double bond after polymerization.
  • a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond it is necessary to perform a treatment for imparting a radical polymerizable double bond after polymerization.
  • the treatment for imparting a radical polymerizable double bond after polymerization differs depending on the type of monomer that can impart a radical polymerizable double bond to be used, and examples thereof include the following treatment.
  • a monomer having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid or itaconic acid, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p- )
  • Treatment of adding a compound having an epoxy group such as vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether and a radically polymerizable double bond.
  • a treatment for adding a compound having a hydroxyl group and a radical polymerizable double bond such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate Is mentioned.
  • a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether is used, (meth)
  • the process which adds the compound which has acidic groups, such as acrylic acid, and a radically polymerizable double bond is mentioned.
  • the content ratio is particularly limited. However, it is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass in the total monomer components.
  • Examples of the monomer for introducing an epoxy group include glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and the like. Can be mentioned.
  • the content ratio is not particularly limited, In the monomer component, the content is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass.
  • copolymerizable monomers include, for example, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n (meth) acrylate -Butyl, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, methyl 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acrylic acid 2- (Meth) acrylic acid esters such as hydroxyethyl; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene, vinyltoluene and ⁇ -methylstyrene; N-substituted maleimides such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide; butadiene, isoprene and the like Butad
  • the content ratio is not particularly limited, but is 95% by mass. The following is preferable, and it is more preferable that it is 85 mass% or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) is not particularly limited, but is formed by the viscosity of the composition for forming a cured film and the composition. From the viewpoint of heat resistance of the coating film, it is preferably 2000 to 200000, more preferably 5000 to 100,000, and still more preferably 5000 to 20000.
  • the acid value is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 It should be ⁇ 400 mg KOH / g.
  • a polymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) can be easily obtained by polymerizing at least the above-mentioned monomer essentially comprising an ether dimer. . At this time, the cyclization reaction of the ether dimer proceeds simultaneously with the polymerization to form a tetrahydropyran ring structure.
  • the polymerization method applied to the synthesis of the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) is not particularly limited, and various conventionally known polymerization methods can be adopted. However, it is particularly preferable to use a solution polymerization method.
  • a polymer formed by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) A coalescence can be synthesized.
  • exemplary compounds of a polymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) are shown, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the composition ratio of the exemplary compounds shown below is mol%.
  • DM dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate
  • BzMA benzyl methacrylate
  • MMA methyl methacrylate
  • MAA Methacrylic acid
  • GMA glycidyl methacrylate
  • the molar ratio of DM: BzMA: MMA: MAA: GMA is preferably 5 to 15:40 to 50: 5 to 15: 5 to 15:20 to 30.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer is preferably 9000 to 20000.
  • the polymer used in the present invention has a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene conversion value measured by GPC method) of preferably 1000 to 2 ⁇ 10 5 , more preferably 2000 to 1 ⁇ 10 5 , and more preferably 5000 to More preferably, it is 5 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • a (meth) acrylic resin having an allyl group, a vinyl ester group, and a carboxyl group in the side chain, and a side chain described in JP-A Nos. 2000-187322 and 2002-62698 are doubled.
  • An alkali-soluble resin having a bond and an alkali-soluble resin having an amide group in the side chain described in JP-A No. 2001-242612 are preferable because of excellent balance of film strength, sensitivity, and developability.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned polymers include: Dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.
  • Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-12004 Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-120041, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-120042, Japanese Patent Publication No. 8-12424, Japanese Patent Publication No. 63-287944, Japanese Patent Publication No. 63-287947.
  • polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene oxide, and the like are useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer.
  • alcohol-soluble nylon, polyether of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin are also useful.
  • the weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 300,000, and the number average molecular weight is preferably It is 1,000 or more, More preferably, it is the range of 2,000 or more and 250,000 or less.
  • the polydispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1.1 or more and 10 or less.
  • These binder polymers may be any of random polymers, block polymers, graft polymers and the like.
  • the binder polymer can be synthesized by a conventionally known method.
  • the solvent used in the synthesis include tetrahydrofuran, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 1-methoxy.
  • Examples include -2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, toluene, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, dimethyl sulfoxide, water and the like. These solvents are used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the radical polymerization initiator used when the binder polymer is synthesized include known compounds such as an azo initiator and a peroxide initiator.
  • the binder polymer can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the cured film may or may not contain a binder polymer, but when it is contained, the content of the binder polymer is preferably 1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less based on the total mass of the cured film. It is more preferably 3% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 4% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
  • a binder polymer when a binder polymer is contained in the composition for cured film formation, it becomes preferable that it becomes the said content with respect to the total solid of the composition for cured film formation.
  • (J) Surfactant Various surfactants may be added to the composition for forming a cured film from the viewpoint of further improving applicability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the composition for forming a cured film contains a fluorosurfactant, so that liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating solution are further improved.
  • Liquidity can be further improved. That is, when forming a film using a composition for forming a cured film containing a fluorosurfactant, the wettability to the coated surface is reduced by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. It improves and the applicability
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a composition for forming a cured film. .
  • fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320 PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), and the like.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include nonionic surfactants described in paragraph 0553 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099 [0679]) and the like. The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • cationic surfactant examples include the cationic surfactant described in paragraph 0554 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0680] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099). The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • silicone surfactant examples include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Tore Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the composition for forming a cured film may or may not contain a surfactant, but when it is contained, the addition amount of the surfactant is 0.001 with respect to the total mass of the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the content is preferably from mass% to 2.0 mass%, more preferably from 0.005 mass% to 1.0 mass%.
  • plasticizers include dioctyl phthalate, didodecyl phthalate, triethylene glycol dicaprylate, dimethyl glycol phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctyl adipate, dibutyl sebacate, and triacetyl glycerin. , 10% by mass or less can be added with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound and the binder polymer.
  • the colored layer forming step is a step of forming a colored layer on the cured film. More specifically, the colored layer 21 is formed on the cured film 20 as shown in FIG.
  • the colored layer 21 can constitute at least one of the pixels of the color filter in the present invention, and is preferably formed of a curable composition containing a colorant. More specifically, in the colored layer forming step, a curable composition containing a colorant is applied directly or via another layer on the cured film, and then dried to form a coated film (coating film) Forming step) and a step of performing heat treatment (post-baking step).
  • a curable composition containing a colorant is applied directly or via another layer on the cured film, and then dried to form a coated film (coating film) Forming step) and a step of performing heat treatment (post-baking step).
  • the curable composition examples include a colored photocurable composition or a non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition.
  • the colored layer is a non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition. It is preferably formed using a composition.
  • the non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition contains a colorant and a thermosetting compound, and the colorant concentration in the total solid content is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass.
  • the colored photocurable composition contains at least a colorant and a photocurable component, and among these, the “photocurable component” is a photocurable composition usually used in a photolithographic method.
  • a composition containing at least a binder resin (alkali-soluble resin or the like), a photosensitive polymerization component (such as a photopolymerization monomer) or a photopolymerization initiator can be used.
  • the colored photocurable composition for example, the matters described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0064 of JP-A-2005-326453 can be suitably applied.
  • the colorant contained in the colored photocurable composition or the non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition used in the colored layer is not particularly limited, and one or two kinds of conventionally known various dyes and pigments are used. A mixture of the above can be used.
  • the pigment include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.1 ⁇ m is preferable, and 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.05 ⁇ m is more preferable.
  • the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the colorant is a dye, it can be dissolved uniformly in the composition to obtain a non-photosensitive thermosetting colored resin composition.
  • the dye that can be used as the colorant is not particularly limited, and conventionally known dyes for color filters can be used.
  • the chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenyl methane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, Xanthene-based, phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based and indigo-based dyes can be used.
  • the colorant content in the total solid content of the colored thermosetting composition in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, and 55% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less. Is more preferable.
  • the content is 50% by mass or more, an appropriate chromaticity as a color filter can be obtained.
  • photocuring can fully be advanced by setting it as less than 100 mass%, and the strength reduction as a film
  • thermosetting compound contained in the non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by heating.
  • a compound having a thermosetting functional group can be used.
  • the thermosetting compound for example, those having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group are preferable.
  • More preferable thermosetting compounds include (a) an epoxy compound, (b) a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, and a glycoluril substituted with at least one substituent selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group.
  • thermosetting compound examples thereof include a compound or a urea compound, (c) a phenol compound, a naphthol compound or a hydroxyanthracene compound substituted with at least one substituent selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group and an acyloxymethyl group.
  • a polyfunctional epoxy compound is particularly preferable as the thermosetting compound.
  • the total content of the thermosetting compound in the colored thermosetting composition varies depending on the material, but is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the colored thermosetting composition. 0.2 to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 1 to 35% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • various additives such as a binder, a curing agent, a curing catalyst, a solvent, a filler, a polymer compound other than the above, as necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • Surfactants, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, aggregation inhibitors, dispersants, and the like can be blended.
  • the binder is often added at the time of preparing the pigment dispersion, does not need alkali solubility, and may be soluble in an organic solvent, and is a linear organic high molecular polymer that is soluble in an organic solvent. preferable.
  • linear organic high molecular polymers examples include polymers having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-. No. 25957, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, etc. Examples thereof include polymers, maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, and acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain are also useful.
  • acrylic resins include copolymers consisting of monomers selected from benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like, such as benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic.
  • acids such as benzyl methacrylate / benzyl methacrylate, KS resist-106 (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), cyclomer P series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and the like.
  • KS resist-106 manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • cyclomer P series manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • an epoxy resin as a thermosetting compound
  • curing agent there are many types of curing agents for epoxy resins, and their properties, pot life with resin and curing agent mixture, viscosity, curing temperature, curing time, heat generation, etc. vary greatly depending on the type of curing agent used. An appropriate curing agent must be selected according to the purpose of use, use conditions, working conditions, and the like.
  • the hardener is described in detail in Chapter 5 of Hiroshi Kakiuchi “Epoxy resin (Shojodo)”. Examples of curing agents are as follows.
  • Those that act catalytically include tertiary amines, boron trifluoride-amine complexes, those that react stoichiometrically with functional groups of epoxy resins, polyamines, acid anhydrides, etc .;
  • Examples include diethylenetriamine, polyamide resin, and medium temperature curing examples such as diethylaminopropylamine and tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol;
  • examples of high temperature curing include phthalic anhydride and metaphenylenediamine.
  • amines diethylenetriamine as an aliphatic polyamine; metaphenylenediamine as an aromatic polyamine; tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol as a tertiary amine; phthalic anhydride as an acid anhydride; polyamide resin Polysulfide resin, boron trifluoride-monoethylamine complex; Synthetic resin initial condensate includes phenol resin, dicyandiamide and the like.
  • both the binder and the curing agent are preferably as small as possible.
  • the curing agent is 35% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less with respect to the thermosetting compound. It is preferable that In order to realize a high colorant concentration in the present invention, curing by reaction between epoxy groups is effective in addition to curing by reaction with a curing agent. For this reason, a curing catalyst can be used without using a curing agent.
  • the addition amount of the curing catalyst is about 1/10 to 1/1000, preferably about 1/20 to 1/500, more preferably about 1/30 to 1 / 1,000 to mass of the epoxy resin having an epoxy equivalent of about 150 to 200. It is possible to cure with a slight amount of about 1/250.
  • the colored thermosetting composition can be used as a solution dissolved in various solvents.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the colored thermosetting composition are satisfied.
  • a dispersing agent can be added.
  • the dispersant known ones can be appropriately selected and used, and examples thereof include a cationic surfactant, a fluorosurfactant, and a polymer dispersant. As these dispersants, many kinds of compounds are used.
  • a phthalocyanine derivative commercial product EFKA-745 (manufactured by Efka)
  • Solsperse 5000 manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • acrylic acid co
  • polymer polyflow No. 75, No. 90, No. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • Nonionic surfactants such as Steal; anionic surfactants such as W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.); EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, Polymer dispersing agents such as EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450 (manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disperse Aid 9100 (manufactured by San Nopco); Solsperse 3000,
  • a dispersing agent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the amount of the dispersant added to the colored thermosetting composition is usually preferably about 0.1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • additives can be further added to the colored thermosetting composition in the present invention as necessary.
  • Specific examples of various additives include, for example, various additives described in JP-A-2005-326453.
  • the colored layer in the present invention can be formed, for example, by applying the above colored thermosetting composition on a cured film and drying it.
  • a colored thermosetting composition can be formed by coating on a cured film by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating, cast coating, roll coating, or the like.
  • the specific thickness of the colored layer is preferably 0.005 ⁇ m to 0.9 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.8 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 0.7 ⁇ m.
  • the colored layer forming step preferably further includes a heating step (may be a post-baking step).
  • the colored layer can be formed by applying a colored thermosetting composition to a support to form a coating film, and then thermally curing the coating film by a heating step.
  • the heating step may be performed at the same time as drying after coating, or a separate thermosetting step may be provided after coating and drying.
  • the heating step uses a known heating means such as an oven or a hot plate, preferably 130 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 280 ° C., particularly preferably 170 ° C. to 260 ° C., preferably 10 seconds. It can be carried out for 3 hours, more preferably 30 seconds to 2 hours, particularly preferably 60 seconds to 60 minutes. However, considering the production, the time required for curing is preferably as short as possible.
  • the photoresist layer forming step is a step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2D, after the colored layer 21 is formed in the colored layer forming step, a photoresist layer 22 (photosensitive resin layer) is further formed on the colored layer 21. Is done.
  • the method for forming the photoresist layer is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that a positive or negative photosensitive resin composition is applied on the colored layer and dried to form the photoresist layer. Further, in the formation of the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment.
  • a pre-bake treatment it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment.
  • the matters described in paragraph numbers 0112 to 0117 of JP-A No. 2007-11324 can be preferably applied to the present invention.
  • the specific thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 2.5 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 0.15 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m.
  • a positive type photosensitive resin composition suitable for positive type photoresists sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays.
  • a positive resist composition can be used.
  • the one that exposes the photosensitive resin layer is preferably g-line or i-line for the purpose of the present invention, and i-line exposure is particularly preferable.
  • a colored layer is formed into a desired shape (for example, a rectangle) by performing an etching process in an etching process described later using a resist pattern formed from a photoresist layer as a mask. Can do.
  • the pattern forming step is a step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer prepared above in a pattern-like manner. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2 (e), the photoresist layer 22 has a desired pattern, for example, a second colored layer having a color different from that of the colored layer 21 is formed on the cured film 20. A pattern corresponding to the region is exposed and developed with a developer to form a resist pattern 24 (photoresist pattern) that functions as an etching mask.
  • the pattern formation step the surface of the colored layer 21 that becomes the first colored layer in a pattern-like manner (the surface opposite to the side where the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles and the colored layer 21 face each other) is exposed. It will be.
  • a region other than a region where the second colored layer is formed on the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles is covered with the resist pattern 24.
  • each step such as etching is performed, the colored layer 21 is formed in a pattern, and the second colored layer is formed on the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles again through each step.
  • another type of pixel is formed.
  • each pixel of the color filter can be formed in a fine and rectangular shape.
  • the photoresist layer 22 is exposed to a positive or negative photosensitive resin composition through a predetermined (image-like) mask pattern, such as g-line, h-line, i-line, preferably i-line. Done by applying.
  • a predetermined (image-like) mask pattern such as g-line, h-line, i-line, preferably i-line. Done by applying.
  • Any developer can be used as long as it does not affect the colored layer 21 containing the colorant and dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist.
  • a combination of various organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
  • the etching step is a step of etching the colored layer by a dry etching method using an etching gas using the resist pattern as an etching mask. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2 (f), a dry etching method using an etching gas (for example, a plasma etching process, etc.) As a typical example of the dry etching method, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-126506 is disclosed. JP-A-59-46628, 58-9108, 58-2809, 57-148706, 61-41102, and the like are known.) Thus, the colored layer 21 not covered with the resist pattern 24 is removed, and a patterned colored layer is formed. In other words, the cured film exposed portion 26 is formed like the resist pattern 24 formed by the pattern forming process.
  • the type of etching gas used in the etching process is not particularly limited, but at least one fluorine-based gas is included from the viewpoint that the colored layer portion (the portion to be etched) removed by the dry etching method can be processed into a rectangle. It is preferable that A known fluorine-based gas can be used as the fluorine-based gas, but a fluorine-based compound gas represented by the following formula (I) is preferable.
  • CnHmFl Formula (I) In the formula, n represents 1 to 6, m represents 0 to 13, and l represents 1 to 14.
  • Examples of the fluorine-based gas represented by the formula (I) include CF 4 , C 2 F 6 , C 3 F 8 , C 2 F 4 , C 4 F 8 , C 4 F 6 , C 5 F 8 , and And at least one selected from the group consisting of CHF 3 .
  • the fluorine-based gas can be used in combination of two or more gases from the above group.
  • the fluorine-based gas is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of CF 4 , C 2 F 6 , C 4 F 8 , and CHF 3 from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion.
  • CF 4 and / or C 2 F 6 are more preferable, and CF 4 is particularly preferable.
  • the etching gas is mixed with oxygen gas.
  • the content ratio (fluorine-based gas / oxygen gas) between the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas in the mixed gas is preferably 2/1 to 8/1 in terms of a flow rate ratio.
  • the content ratio of the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas is 2/1 to 6/1 in terms of preventing the redeposition of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24 while maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion. It is preferable that the ratio is 3/1 to 5/1.
  • the mixed gas is further mixed with helium (He), neon (from the viewpoint of maintaining the etching plasma partial pressure control stability and the verticality of the shape to be etched.
  • He helium
  • Ne argon
  • Ar krypton
  • Xe xenon
  • other rare gases e.g., CCl 4 , CClF 3 , AlF 3 , AlCl 3, etc.
  • N 2 CO, and preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of CO 2
  • Ar, He, Kr at least one selected from the group consisting of N 2
  • Xe More preferably, it includes a species, and more preferably includes at least one selected from the group consisting of He, Ar, and Xe.
  • the mixed gas may consist only of a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas.
  • the content of other gases that may be contained in addition to the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas is preferably 25 or less in terms of a flow rate ratio when the oxygen gas is 1, and is 10 or more and 20 or less. More preferably, it is 14 or more and 18 or less.
  • the dry etching processing time calculation method calculates the etching rate (nm / min.) In the etching process, and calculates the processing time required for etching from the calculated etching rate.
  • the etching rate can be calculated, for example, by collecting the relationship between the etching time and the remaining film.
  • the etching time is preferably 10 minutes or less, and more preferably 7 minutes or less.
  • the internal pressure of the chamber in the etching process is preferably 2.0 to 6.0 Pa, more preferably 4.0 to 5.0 Pa, and the pattern has a rectangular shape due to the internal pressure of the chamber being in the above range. And the adhesion of the sidewall protective film produced by etching to the photoresist can be suppressed.
  • the internal pressure of the chamber can be adjusted, for example, by appropriately controlling the flow rate of the etching gas and the degree of decompression of the chamber.
  • the temperature of the substrate 1a is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 100 ° C. or lower.
  • the temperature is preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., and preferably 40 ° C. to 60 ° C. from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion and suppressing the reattachment of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24.
  • the temperature of the substrate 1a can be set to 30 ° C. or more and 100 ° C. or less by controlling the temperature of the wafer stage to 30 ° C. or more and 100 ° C. or less.
  • the dry etching conditions in the etching process vary depending on the material, layer thickness, and the like of the colored layer 21, but preferable conditions other than the above conditions will be described below.
  • the gas flow rate of the mixed gas is preferably 1500 mL / min (0 ° C., 1013 hPa) or less, and more preferably 500 to 1000 mL / min (0 ° C., 1013 hPa).
  • the high frequency can be selected from 400 kHz, 60 MHz, 13.56 MHz, 2.45 GHz, and the like, and can be processed with an RF power of 50 to 2000 W, preferably 100 to 1000 W.
  • RF power / antenna bias / substrate bias is preferably 600 to 1000 W / 300 to 500 W / 150 to 250 W, and more preferably 700 to 900 W, respectively. / 350 to 450 / 200W.
  • the etching process is preferably a process in which part or all of the colored layer is etched using an etching gas containing a fluorine-based gas.
  • the etching process includes two or more stages with different etching conditions.
  • the etching process may be included.
  • the colored layer is etched using an etching gas containing fluorine gas (first etching step), and the etching is stopped before the cured film containing the metal oxide particles is completely exposed.
  • the second etching may be performed using a different gas (for example, a mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas).
  • a mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas for example, a mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
  • the substrate 1a serving as a support formed by the planarizing layer 10 and the like located under the cured film 20 is exposed using only the first mixed gas.
  • the support tends to be damaged. Further, the generated support damage was particularly noticeable when an over-etching process was performed.
  • the support damage is reduced by performing the second etching step using a second mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, which is different from the first mixed gas used in the first etching step. Etching with suppressed generation is possible.
  • the layer can be removed.
  • the resist pattern 24 can be easily peeled off by the stripping solution or the solvent.
  • the second mixed gas used in the second etching step includes nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, but may contain a fluorine-based gas as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • the content ratio of the fluorine-based gas is preferably 5% or less in terms of flow rate ratio, and particularly preferably does not contain the fluorine-based gas.
  • the content ratio of nitrogen gas to oxygen gas (nitrogen gas / oxygen gas) in the second mixed gas is preferably 10/1 to 3/1 in terms of a flow rate ratio.
  • the content ratio is preferably in the range of 20/1 to 3/1 from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion and preventing the redeposition of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24, and 15/1 to 4 / 1 is more preferable, and 10/1 to 5/1 is particularly preferable.
  • the second mixed gas is further made of helium (He), neon ( Ne), argon (Ar), krypton (Kr), and xenon (Xe) are preferably included.
  • the gas is preferably selected from the group consisting of He, Ar, and Xe. More preferably, it contains at least one kind of gas.
  • the second mixed gas can be composed of only nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
  • the content of other gases that may be further contained is preferably 25 or less in terms of a flow rate ratio when the oxygen gas is 1. It is preferably 20 or more and particularly preferably 8 or more and 12 or less.
  • the dry etching process is performed after the processing time calculated in the same manner as in the first etching process from the start of the dry etching process for removing the colored layer 21 remaining in the first etching process. Can be terminated. Further, the dry etching processing time for removing the remaining colored layer 21 by endpoint detection may be managed. In the second etching step, it is preferable to manage the dry etching processing time for removing the colored layer 21 by endpoint detection. The etching processing time is preferably within 10 minutes, more preferably within 7 minutes.
  • the internal pressure of the chamber is preferably 1.0 to 5.0 Pa, and more preferably 2.0 to 4.0 Pa.
  • a pattern in which the occurrence of damage to the support is suppressed can be more efficiently formed without impairing the rectangularity of the pattern under conditions that satisfy the mixing ratio of the mixed gas and the internal pressure of the chamber.
  • RF power / antenna bias / substrate bias is preferably 400 to 800 W / 50 to 200 W / 100 to 300 W, more preferably 500, respectively. 700W / 100 to 150W / 200 to 300W.
  • the support temperature and other conditions during the etching process in the second etching process the matters described in the first etching process can be suitably applied.
  • the second etching step further includes an overetching treatment step.
  • the overetching treatment is preferably performed by setting an overetching time.
  • the over-etching time can be set arbitrarily, the etching process time (t1) in the first etching process and the etching process in the second etching process in terms of the etching resistance of the resist pattern 24 and the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched.
  • the total processing time (t1 + t2) with the time (t2) is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 5 to 25%, and particularly preferably 15 to 20%.
  • the resist pattern removing step is a step of removing the resist pattern remaining after the etching step. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2G, after the etching process is completed, the resist pattern 24 of the mask is made removable with a special stripping solution or solvent and removed using cleaning water. In addition, in this invention, by applying the hardened layer containing metal oxide particles, peeling of the color filter (patterned colored layer) is sufficiently suppressed when the resist pattern 24 is peeled off, so that the resist pattern 24 is formed. Can be removed.
  • a paddle development process in which a stripping solution or a solvent is applied on at least the resist pattern 24 and is held for a predetermined time.
  • a paddle development process in which a stripping solution or a solvent is applied on at least the resist pattern 24 and is held for a predetermined time.
  • time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
  • the resist pattern 24 is removed by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 24 from, for example, a spray-type or shower-type spray nozzle.
  • pure water can be preferably used.
  • the injection nozzle examples include an injection nozzle in which the entire support body is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support body.
  • the spray nozzle is movable, during the process of removing the resist pattern 24, the resist pattern 24 is more effectively moved by spraying cleaning water by moving from the center of the substrate 1a to the end of the substrate 1a at least twice. Can be removed.
  • the stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent.
  • the organic solvent include hydrocarbon compounds, halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, alcohol compounds, ether or acetal compounds, ketones or aldehyde compounds, ester compounds, polyhydric alcohol compounds, carboxylic acids or acids thereof. Examples thereof include an anhydride compound, a phenol compound, a nitrogen-containing compound, a sulfur-containing compound, and a fluorine-containing compound.
  • the stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group.
  • they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH).
  • Cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ⁇ -caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, 2-pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, 2,6-lutidine and the like are preferable, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine are preferred, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) is more preferred.
  • the stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • acyclic nitrogen-containing compound at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanolamine, and cyclic
  • the nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by mass to 11 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 65 parts by mass to 70 parts by mass. It is desirable.
  • stripping solution is what diluted the mixture of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound and the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
  • a two-color filter is manufactured by forming a colored layer different from the colored layer already formed on the cured film exposed portion 26, and the photoresist layer is again formed on the two-color filter. If a formation process is formed and the pattern formation process, the etching process, and the resist pattern removal process are similarly repeated, a multicolored color filter is formed.
  • a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm is formed on a support, and an etching gas is used in the etching step.
  • an etching gas is used in the etching step.
  • the color filter produced by the production method of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device such as a liquid crystal display device or a CCD, and is particularly suitable for a high-resolution CCD device or a CMOS having more than 1 million pixels.
  • the color filter of the present invention can be used as, for example, a color filter disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD and a microlens for condensing light.
  • Example 1 [Preparation of metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition)]
  • a mixed liquid having the following composition as a circulation type dispersion apparatus (bead mill), an ultra-apex mill manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo Co., Ltd. was used for dispersion treatment as follows to obtain a titanium dioxide dispersion as a dispersion composition. . ⁇ Composition ⁇ ⁇ Titanium dioxide (Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • the dispersant (B-1) was synthesized according to the synthesis method described in paragraphs [0266] to [0348] of JP-A-2007-277514. Specifically, it is as follows. 100 parts of dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate) [(33); manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.] and the following compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond ( A-3) 91.38 parts were dissolved in 446.6 parts of 1-methoxy-2-propanol and heated to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen stream.
  • V-601 dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] was added and heated for 2 hours. Further, 0.81 part of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. By cooling to room temperature, a 30% by mass solution of a mercaptan compound was obtained.
  • a mixed solution of 499.57 parts of a 30% by mass solution of the mercaptan compound and 100.13 parts of methyl methacrylate (M-1) was heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen stream.
  • M-1 methyl methacrylate
  • 0.681 parts of dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] was added 72.73 parts of propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate.
  • the solution dissolved in was added dropwise over 2 hours, followed by heating at 90 ° C. for 2 hours.
  • 0.230 parts of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. Again, 0.230 parts of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C.
  • the dispersing apparatus was operated under the following conditions. ⁇ Bead diameter: ⁇ 0.05mm ⁇ Bead filling rate: 75% by volume ⁇ Peripheral speed: 10m / sec ⁇ Pump supply amount: 10 kg / hour ⁇ Cooling water: Tap water ⁇ Bead mill annular passage volume: 0.15 L ⁇ Amount of liquid mixture to be dispersed: 0.44 kg
  • the average particle size was measured at 30 minute intervals (one pass time). The average particle diameter decreased with the dispersion time (pass number), but the amount of change gradually decreased. Dispersion was terminated when the change in the primary particle size when the dispersion time was extended by 30 minutes became 5 nm or less.
  • the primary particle diameter of the titanium dioxide particles in this dispersion was 40 nm.
  • the primary particle diameter of titanium dioxide is measured by diluting a mixed liquid or dispersion containing titanium dioxide 80 times with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and using the dynamic light scattering method for the obtained diluted liquid. Is obtained. This measurement is the number average particle diameter obtained by using Microtrack UPA-EX150 manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.
  • composition for forming cured film [Preparation of composition for forming cured film] Using the metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition) obtained above, each component was mixed so as to obtain the following composition to obtain a composition for forming a cured film.
  • the composition for forming a cured film was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coater (manufactured by Tokyo Electron, ACT-8). Heating was performed at 230 ° C. for 10 minutes using a hot plate to form a cured film having a thickness of 0.4 ⁇ m.
  • the cured film contains titanium dioxide having a primary particle size of 40 nm.
  • a pigment-containing thermosetting composition (colored thermosetting composition) (SG-5000L, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) is applied onto the cured film as a spin coater (Tokyo Electron, ACT-8). The film was applied so that the film thickness was 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the film thickness of the colored layer formed by the pigment-containing thermosetting composition was 0.6 ⁇ m.
  • a positive photoresist “FHi622BC” (manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) is applied onto the SG-5000L using a spin coater (manufactured by Tokyo Electron, ACT-8) and 100 ° C. Then, a heat treatment for 2 minutes was performed to form a photoresist layer so that the film thickness was 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the pattern formation process the area corresponding to the filter array of RED is subjected to pattern exposure of 350 mJ / cm 2 with an i-line stepper (manufactured by Canon, FPA3000i5 +), and heat treatment is performed at 110 ° C. for 1 minute.
  • etching process As an etching process, RF power: 800 W, antenna bias: 400 W, wafer bias: 200 W, chamber internal pressure: 4.0 Pa, substrate temperature: 50 with a dry etching apparatus (U-621, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) ° C, the gas type and flow rate of the mixed gas were CF 4 : 200 mL / min. , O 2 : 50 mL / min. , Ar: 800 mL / min. And an etching process for 111 seconds was performed. The etching rate of SG-5000L under the etching conditions was 326 nm / min, and the shaving amount of the colored layer was 603 nm. Therefore, all the colored layers formed of SG-5000L were removed in the etching process.
  • a dry etching apparatus U-621, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation
  • a resist stripping process was performed for 120 seconds using a photoresist stripping solution “MS-230C” (manufactured by Fujifilm Electronics Materials) to remove the resist pattern. According to the above procedure, a color filter pattern was formed, and a monochromatic color filter was produced.
  • Example 1 ⁇ Examples 2 to 12, Comparative Example 1> As shown in Table 1 below, the materials used and the component ratios were changed, and color filters were produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 above, and peeled off.
  • the primary particle diameter of “titanium dioxide” shown in Table 1 was 40 nm, and the primary particle diameter of “zirconium oxide” was 20 nm.
  • the metal oxide particle is not contained in the cured film.
  • “B-2” shown in Table 1 is the following compound.
  • Dispersant B-2 was synthesized according to the following procedure. 10 g of polyethyleneimine (SP-018, number average molecular weight 1,800, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai) and 100 g of the following polyester (i-1) were mixed and heated at 120 ° C. for 3 hours to obtain an intermediate. Thereafter, the mixture is allowed to cool to 65 ° C., 200 g of propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PGMEA) containing 2.3 g of succinic anhydride is slowly added, and the mixture is stirred for 2 hours. -2 was obtained. When the acid value of the intermediate was titrated, it was confirmed that the acid value was 6.4 mgKOH / g.
  • SP-018 number average molecular weight 1,800, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai
  • the acid value was 17.9 mgKOH / g
  • the amine value was 46.2 mgKOH / g. That is, (k) is based on the difference between the acid number of the dispersant B-2 and the acid number of the intermediate, and (l1 + l2) is based on the difference between the amine number of the dispersant B-2 and the number of nitrogen atoms in the resin before the reaction.
  • the weight average molecular weight by GPC method was 15,000.
  • Comparative Example 2 instead of a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm, a color filter was produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 except that ACCUGLASS (manufactured by Rasa Industrial Co., Ltd.) was used. Peeling evaluation was performed. Note that Comparative Example 2 corresponds to the aspect specifically disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above.
  • “dispersion amount” means the mass part of the metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition) added to the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the “Amount” column in the “Polymerizable compound” column intends parts by mass of the polymerizable compound added to the cured film forming composition.
  • the “amount” column in the “binder polymer” column intends a part by mass of the binder polymer added to the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the “Amount” column in the “Surfactant” column intends a mass part of the surfactant added to the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the “PGMEA amount” column intends parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) added to the composition for forming a cured film.
  • the “metal oxide content” column intends the content (mass%: wt%) of metal oxide particles in the cured film.
  • the “number of peeling” column intends the number of peeling defects.
  • DPHA dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • OX-01 is an initiator manufactured by BASF.
  • the color filter obtained by the production method of the present invention was good with little pattern peeling after peeling of the resist pattern.
  • Examples 1 to 8 when the content of the metal oxide particles in the cured film is 50% by mass or more and 77% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the cured film (Examples 1 to 3). In the case), it was confirmed that pattern peeling was further reduced.
  • Comparative Example 1 in which a cured film was not provided and in Comparative Example 2 specifically disclosed in Patent Document 1, pattern peeling was large and the effect was inferior.
  • SYMBOLS 1 Solid-state imaging device, 1a ... Board

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)
  • Solid State Image Pick-Up Elements (AREA)

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a method for producing a color filter, wherein separation of a color filter is suppressed in a step for removing a resist pattern. A method for producing a color filter according to the present invention comprises: a cured film forming step wherein a cured film that contains metal oxide particles having primary particle diameters of 1-100 nm is formed on a supporting body; a colored layer forming step wherein a colored layer is formed on the cured film; a photoresist layer forming step wherein a photoresist layer is formed on the colored layer; a pattern forming step wherein a resist pattern is formed on the colored layer by partially removing the photoresist layer into the form of a pattern; an etching step wherein the colored layer is etched using the resist pattern as an etching mask by a dry etching method using an etching gas; and a resist pattern removing step wherein the remaining resist pattern is removed after the etching step.

Description

カラーフィルタの製造方法Manufacturing method of color filter
 本発明は、カラーフィルタの製造方法に係り、特に、ドライエッチング法を用いたカラーフィルタの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a color filter, and more particularly to a method for manufacturing a color filter using a dry etching method.
 液晶表示素子や固体撮像素子に用いられるカラーフィルタにおいては更なる高精細化が望まれている。特に、固体撮像素子の微細化は顕著であり、2.0μmサイズを下回る高解像技術が必要となっており、従来のフォトリソ法では解像力の限界になりつつある。 In the color filters used for liquid crystal display elements and solid-state image sensors, further higher definition is desired. In particular, miniaturization of a solid-state imaging device is remarkable, and a high-resolution technique lower than 2.0 μm size is required, and the resolution of the conventional photolithographic method is becoming a limit.
 フォトリソ法を利用するカラーフィルタの製造法に対して、より薄膜で、かつ微細パターンの形成に有効な方法としてドライエッチング法が知られている。ドライエッチング法は、色素の蒸着薄膜に対してパターン形成する方法として従来から採用されており、様々な方法が提案されている。
 例えば、特許文献1では、着色層を除去した領域の支持体の一部までもが削られ、段差が発生してしまうことを抑制するために、金属によるストッパー層を使用することが提案されている。
A dry etching method is known as a method that is effective for forming a fine pattern with a thinner film than a manufacturing method of a color filter using a photolithography method. The dry etching method has been conventionally employed as a method of forming a pattern on a dye-deposited thin film, and various methods have been proposed.
For example, in Patent Document 1, it is proposed to use a stopper layer made of metal in order to prevent even a part of the support in the region from which the colored layer has been removed from being cut and a step is generated. Yes.
特開2008-241744号公報JP 2008-241744 A
 しかしながら、本発明者らが特許文献1で具体的に開示されているストッパー膜(ラサ工業社製ACCUGLASS)を用いてその評価を行ったところ、後工程のレジストパターンを除去する際、形成されたカラーフィルタが支持体から剥がれてしまう場合があることを知見した。 However, when the inventors conducted an evaluation using the stopper film (ACCUGLASS manufactured by Lhasa Kogyo Co., Ltd.) specifically disclosed in Patent Document 1, it was formed when removing the resist pattern in the subsequent process. It has been found that the color filter may be peeled off from the support.
 本発明は、上記実情に鑑みて、レジストパターンの除去工程におけるカラーフィルタの剥がれが抑制されたカラーフィルタの製造方法を提供することを目的とする。 In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a color filter in which peeling of the color filter in the resist pattern removing step is suppressed.
 本発明者は、上記課題を達成すべく鋭意研究した結果、支持体上に一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜を設けることにより上記課題を解決できることを見出し、本発明を完成させた。
 すなわち、本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記課題が解決できることを見出した。
As a result of diligent research to achieve the above problems, the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by providing a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on a support. Completed the invention.
That is, the present inventors have found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
(1) 支持体上に、一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜を形成する硬化膜形成工程と、
 硬化膜上に、着色層を形成する着色層形成工程と、
 着色層上に、フォトレジスト層を形成するフォトレジスト層形成工程と、
 フォトレジスト層をパターン様に除去することにより、着色層上にレジストパターンを形成するパターン形成工程と、
 レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして、エッチングガスを用いたドライエッチング法によって着色層をエッチングするエッチング工程と、
 エッチング工程後に残存するレジストパターンを除去するレジストパターン除去工程と、を含むことを特徴とするカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(2) 硬化膜中における金属酸化物粒子の含有量が、硬化膜全質量に対して、50質量%以上77質量%以下である、(1)に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(3) 金属酸化物粒子が、二酸化チタン及び酸化ジルコニウムからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、(1)又は(2)に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(4) 硬化膜の厚さが5nmから500nmである、(1)~(3)のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(5) 硬化膜が、重量平均分子量10000以下の後述する一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物(A)を含有する、(1)~(4)のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(6) 硬化膜形成工程が、金属酸化物粒子と分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを少なくとも含む硬化膜形成用組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程である、(1)~(5)のいずれかに記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
(1) a cured film forming step of forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on a support;
A colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer on the cured film;
A photoresist layer forming step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
A pattern forming step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer in a pattern-like manner;
Using the resist pattern as an etching mask, an etching process for etching the colored layer by a dry etching method using an etching gas;
And a resist pattern removing step of removing a resist pattern remaining after the etching step.
(2) The manufacturing method of the color filter as described in (1) whose content of the metal oxide particle in a cured film is 50 to 77 mass% with respect to the cured film total mass.
(3) The method for producing a color filter according to (1) or (2), wherein the metal oxide particles are at least one selected from the group consisting of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide.
(4) The method for producing a color filter according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein the thickness of the cured film is 5 nm to 500 nm.
(5) The color filter according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the cured film contains a polymer compound (A) represented by the general formula (1) described later having a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less. Production method.
(6) The cured film forming step is a step of forming a cured film using a composition for forming a cured film including at least a metal oxide particle and a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule. , (1)-(5) The manufacturing method of the color filter in any one of (5).
 本発明によれば、レジストパターンの除去工程におけるカラーフィルタの剥がれが抑制されたカラーフィルタの製造方法を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a color filter in which peeling of the color filter in the resist pattern removing step is suppressed.
本発明によるカラーフィルタが用いられる固体撮像素子の断面図。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a solid-state imaging device in which a color filter according to the present invention is used. 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法を示した断面図。Sectional drawing which showed the manufacturing method of the color filter of this invention.
 以下、添付図面に従って本発明に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法の好ましい実施の形態について詳説する。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of a method for producing a color filter according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
 まず、本発明に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法により形成されるカラーフィルタが用いられた固体撮像素子等の例を示す。図1は、固体撮像素子の断面図である。
 固体撮像装置1は、n型の基板の上にp型のウエル層が形成された半導体基板2の表面に、n型の固体撮像素子3、n型の転送チャネル4が形成されている。転送チャネル4の上方には、酸化シリコン等からなる絶縁膜を介し、転送電極5が形成されている。
 転送電極5は、W(タングステン)等により形成され、固体撮像素子3上方に開口部を有する遮光膜により覆われている。遮光膜により覆われた転送電極5の上には、常圧CVD法により成膜され、リフロされたBPSG膜6が形成されている。
 BPSG膜6には、下凸レンズの形状が形成されており、下凸レンズ形状部分には、層内レンズ7が高屈折率で透過性の高いSiNをプラズマCVDすることにより形成されている。
 層内レンズ7の上方には、有機樹脂膜、BPSG膜、又は酸化シリコン系絶縁膜等により形成された平坦化層10が形成されている。
 平坦化層10上には、赤(R)、緑(G)、青(B)の三原色で構成されるカラーフィルタ8が形成される。カラーフィルタ8の上には、フォトレジスト材料によりマイクロレンズ9が形成されている。
First, an example of a solid-state image sensor using a color filter formed by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a solid-state imaging device.
In the solid-state imaging device 1, an n-type solid-state imaging device 3 and an n-type transfer channel 4 are formed on the surface of a semiconductor substrate 2 in which a p-type well layer is formed on an n-type substrate. A transfer electrode 5 is formed above the transfer channel 4 via an insulating film made of silicon oxide or the like.
The transfer electrode 5 is formed of W (tungsten) or the like, and is covered with a light shielding film having an opening above the solid-state imaging device 3. A reflowed BPSG film 6 is formed on the transfer electrode 5 covered with the light shielding film by an atmospheric pressure CVD method.
The BPSG film 6 has a shape of a downward convex lens. In the downward convex lens shape portion, an inner lens 7 is formed by plasma CVD of SiN having a high refractive index and high transparency.
Above the in-layer lens 7, a planarizing layer 10 formed of an organic resin film, a BPSG film, a silicon oxide insulating film, or the like is formed.
On the planarizing layer 10, a color filter 8 composed of the three primary colors red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is formed. On the color filter 8, a microlens 9 is formed of a photoresist material.
 固体撮像装置1はこのような構成を備え、マイクロレンズ9より入射した光がカラーフィルタ8を通過することにより各色の光が抽出され、層内レンズ7により集められた各色の光は固体撮像素子3により電気信号に変換される。 The solid-state imaging device 1 has such a configuration, and light of each color is extracted when light incident from the microlens 9 passes through the color filter 8, and the light of each color collected by the in-layer lens 7 is solid-state imaging device. 3 is converted into an electric signal.
 続いて、本発明に係わるカラーフィルタの製造方法について説明する。図2はカラーフィルタの製造方法を示した断面図である。
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、支持体上に硬化膜を形成する硬化膜形成工程と、硬化膜上に着色層を形成する着色層形成工程と、着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成するフォトレジスト層形成工程と、フォトレジスト層をパターン様に除去することにより、着色層上にレジストパターンを形成するパターン形成工程と、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層のエッチングを行うエッチング工程と、レジストパターンを除去するレジストパターン除去(剥離)工程とを備える。
 以下、各工程で使用される材料・手順について詳述する。
Then, the manufacturing method of the color filter concerning this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view showing a color filter manufacturing method.
The method for producing a color filter of the present invention includes a cured film forming step of forming a cured film on a support, a colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer on the cured film, and a photoresist layer on the colored layer. A photoresist layer forming step, a pattern forming step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer in a pattern, an etching step of etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask, and a resist A resist pattern removing (peeling) step of removing the pattern.
Hereinafter, materials and procedures used in each process will be described in detail.
<硬化膜形成工程>
 硬化膜形成工程は、支持体上に、一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜を形成する工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(a)及び(b)に示すように、平坦化層10まで形成された支持体としての基板1aの平坦化層10上に、一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜20が形成される。
 なお、図2(b)においては、平坦化層10上に硬化膜20が形成されているが、平坦化層10そのものが、上記硬化膜であってもよい。
 まず、支持体、及び、硬化膜中に含まれる材料について詳述し、その後工程の手順について詳述する。
<Curing film formation process>
The cured film forming step is a step of forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on the support.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the primary particle diameter is 1 nm to 100 nm on the planarizing layer 10 of the substrate 1a as the support formed up to the planarizing layer 10. A cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles is formed.
In FIG. 2B, the cured film 20 is formed on the planarizing layer 10, but the planarized layer 10 itself may be the cured film.
First, the support and the material contained in the cured film will be described in detail, and the procedure of the subsequent process will be described in detail.
(支持体)
 支持体となる基板1aとしては、カラーフィルタが用いられるものであれば特に制限はないが、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板、例えば、シリコン基板、酸化膜、窒化シリコン等が挙げられる。また、これら支持体と着色層の間には本発明の効果を損なわない限り中間層など他の層が設けられていてもよい。
(Support)
The substrate 1a serving as a support is not particularly limited as long as a color filter is used, and examples thereof include a photoelectric conversion element substrate used for a solid-state imaging element, such as a silicon substrate, an oxide film, and silicon nitride. . Further, other layers such as an intermediate layer may be provided between the support and the colored layer as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
((A)金属酸化物粒子)
 硬化膜中に含まれる金属酸化物粒子の一次粒子径は、1~100nmである。なかでも、硬化膜の透明性と、硬化性組成物の経時安定性の観点で、5~80nmが好ましく、10~70nmがさらに好ましい。
 一次粒子径が1nm未満の場合、硬化性組成物の経時安定性が悪くなると共に、レジストパターン除去の際に支持体からカラーフィルタの剥がれも発生する。また、100nm超の場合、光散乱により硬化膜の透明性が低下すると共に、レジストパターン除去の際に支持体からカラーフィルタの剥がれも発生する。
 金属酸化物粒子の一次粒子径は平均値であり、その測定方法としては、硬化膜の断面を電子顕微鏡で観察し、少なくとも20個以上の金属酸化物粒子の一次粒子径(直径)を測定し、それらを算術平均して求める。なお、金属酸化物粒子が球状でない場合、その長径を直径として取り扱う。
 なお、後述するように金属酸化物粒子を含む硬化膜形成用組成物を用いる場合は、組成物中における金属酸化物粒子の一次粒子径を公知の装置(例えば、日機装 マイクロトラックUPA-EX150(動的光散乱法))により測定し、求めることができる。
((A) metal oxide particles)
The primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles contained in the cured film is 1 to 100 nm. Among these, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film and stability over time of the curable composition, 5 to 80 nm is preferable, and 10 to 70 nm is more preferable.
When the primary particle diameter is less than 1 nm, the temporal stability of the curable composition is deteriorated, and the color filter is peeled off from the support when the resist pattern is removed. On the other hand, when the thickness exceeds 100 nm, the transparency of the cured film decreases due to light scattering, and the color filter peels off from the support when the resist pattern is removed.
The primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles is an average value. The measurement method is to observe the cross section of the cured film with an electron microscope and measure the primary particle diameter (diameter) of at least 20 metal oxide particles. Find them by arithmetic averaging. In addition, when a metal oxide particle is not spherical, the major axis is handled as a diameter.
As will be described later, when a composition for forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles is used, the primary particle diameter of the metal oxide particles in the composition is determined by a known device (for example, Nikkiso Microtrac UPA-EX150 (dynamic It can be measured and determined by the automatic light scattering method)).
 金属酸化物粒子に含まれる金属原子の種類は特に制限されず、例えば、周期律表(IUPAC1991)の第4周期、第5周期、及び第6周期からなる群から選ばれる金属原子を含むことが好ましい。また、第2~14族からなる群から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の金属を含有することが好ましく、第2族、第8族、第9族、第10族、第11族、第12族、第13族、及び第14族からなる群から選ばれる金属原子を含むことがより好ましい。
 より具体的には、例えば、銅、銀、金、白金、亜鉛、パラジウム、ニッケル、錫、インジウム、ロジウム、イリジウム、鉄、ケイ素、アルミニウム、ルテニウム、オスミウム、マンガン、モリブデン、タングステン、ニオブ、タンタル、チタン、ビスマス、アンチモン、ジルコニウム及び鉛からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の金属原子が挙げられる。なかでも、チタン、ジルコニウム、亜鉛、アルミニウムがより好ましく、チタンがさらに好ましい。これらの金属原子が好ましい理由としては、電子密度が高いことが影響していると推測される。
 金属酸化物粒子の具体例としては、例えば、酸化チタン、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化亜鉛、酸化アルミニウムなどが挙げられる。
The type of metal atom contained in the metal oxide particle is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a metal atom selected from the group consisting of the fourth period, the fifth period, and the sixth period of the periodic table (IUPAC 1991). preferable. Further, it is preferable to contain one or more metals selected from the group consisting of Groups 2 to 14, and Group 2, Group 8, Group 9, Group 10, Group 11, Group 12 are preferably contained. More preferably, it contains a metal atom selected from the group consisting of Group, Group 13, and Group 14.
More specifically, for example, copper, silver, gold, platinum, zinc, palladium, nickel, tin, indium, rhodium, iridium, iron, silicon, aluminum, ruthenium, osmium, manganese, molybdenum, tungsten, niobium, tantalum, Examples thereof include at least one metal atom selected from the group consisting of titanium, bismuth, antimony, zirconium and lead. Of these, titanium, zirconium, zinc, and aluminum are more preferable, and titanium is more preferable. It is presumed that the reason why these metal atoms are preferable is that the electron density is high.
Specific examples of the metal oxide particles include titanium oxide, zirconium oxide, zinc oxide, and aluminum oxide.
 無色又は透明な二酸化チタン粒子としては、化学式TiOで表すことができ、純度が70%以上であることが好ましく、純度80%以上であることがより好ましく、純度85%以上であることが更に好ましい。一般式Ti2n-1(nは2~4の数を表す。)で表される低次酸化チタン、酸窒化チタン等は、粒子の全質量に対して、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、20質量%以下であることがより好ましく、15質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、二酸化チタン粒子としては、ルチル形結晶のものが好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子の屈折率としては特に制限はないが、高屈折率を得る観点から、1.75~2.70であることが好ましく、1.90~2.70であることが更に好ましい。この屈折率の測定方法はアッベ屈折率計(アタゴ(株)製)にて測定することができる(測定温度25℃,波長633nm)。
 また金属酸化物粒子の比表面積は、10m/g~400m/gであることが好ましく、20m/g~200m/gであることが更に好ましく、30m/g~150m/gであることが最も好ましい。
 また金属酸化物粒子の形状には特に制限はない。例えば、米粒状、球形状、立方体状、紡錘形状あるいは不定形状であることができる。
The colorless or transparent titanium dioxide particles can be represented by the chemical formula TiO 2 , preferably have a purity of 70% or more, more preferably have a purity of 80% or more, and further have a purity of 85% or more. preferable. The low-order titanium oxide, titanium oxynitride, etc. represented by the general formula Ti n O 2n-1 (n represents a number of 2 to 4) is 30% by mass or less based on the total mass of the particles. Is preferable, it is more preferable that it is 20 mass% or less, and it is still more preferable that it is 15 mass% or less. Moreover, as a titanium dioxide particle, the thing of a rutile type crystal | crystallization is preferable.
The refractive index of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.75 to 2.70, more preferably 1.90 to 2.70 from the viewpoint of obtaining a high refractive index. This refractive index can be measured with an Abbe refractometer (manufactured by Atago Co., Ltd.) (measurement temperature 25 ° C., wavelength 633 nm).
The specific surface area of the metal oxide particles is preferably 10 m 2 / g to 400 m 2 / g, more preferably 20 m 2 / g to 200 m 2 / g, and 30 m 2 / g to 150 m 2 / g. Most preferably.
Moreover, there is no restriction | limiting in particular in the shape of a metal oxide particle. For example, it can be a rice grain shape, a spherical shape, a cubic shape, a spindle shape, or an indefinite shape.
 金属酸化物粒子は、有機化合物により表面処理されたものであってもよい。表面処理に用いる有機化合物の例には、ポリオール、アルカノールアミン、ステアリン酸、シランカップリング剤及びチタネートカップリング剤が含まれる。中でもステアリン酸が好ましい。
 表面処理は、1種単独の表面処理剤でも、2種類以上の表面処理剤を組み合わせて実施してもよい。
 また金属酸化物粒子の表面が、アルミニウム、ケイ素、ジルコニアなどの酸化物により処理されていることもまた好ましい。これにより、耐候性が向上する。
The metal oxide particles may have been surface-treated with an organic compound. Examples of the organic compound used for the surface treatment include polyols, alkanolamines, stearic acid, silane coupling agents, and titanate coupling agents. Of these, stearic acid is preferred.
The surface treatment may be carried out by using a single surface treatment agent or a combination of two or more surface treatment agents.
It is also preferable that the surface of the metal oxide particles is treated with an oxide such as aluminum, silicon, or zirconia. Thereby, a weather resistance improves.
 金属酸化物粒子としては、市販されているものを好ましく用いることができる。
 二酸化チタン粒子の市販物としては、例えば石原産業(株)製TTOシリーズ(TTO-51(A)、TTO-51(C)、TTO-55(C)、など)、TTO-S、Vシリーズ(TTO-S-1、TTO-S-2、TTO-V-3など)、テイカ(株)製MTシリーズ(MT-01、MT-05など)などを挙げることができる。
 二酸化ジルコニウム粒子の市販物としては、例えば、UEP(第一稀元素化学工業(株)製)、PCS(日本電工(株)製)、JS-01、JS-03、JS-04(日本電工(株)製)、UEP-100(第一稀元素化学工業(株)製)などを挙げることができる。
 二酸化珪素粒子の市販物としては、例えば、OG502-31クラリアント社(Clariant Co.)製などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物粒子は、1種単独でも、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
As a metal oxide particle, what is marketed can be used preferably.
Examples of commercially available titanium dioxide particles include TTO series (TTO-51 (A), TTO-51 (C), TTO-55 (C), etc.), TTO-S, V series (made by Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd.). And TTO-S-1, TTO-S-2, TTO-V-3, etc.) and MT series (MT-01, MT-05, etc.) manufactured by Teika Corporation.
Examples of commercially available zirconium dioxide particles include UEP (Daiichi Rare Element Chemical Co., Ltd.), PCS (Nippon Denko Co., Ltd.), JS-01, JS-03, JS-04 (Nippon Denko ( And UEP-100 (Daiichi Rare Element Chemical Industries, Ltd.).
Examples of commercially available silicon dioxide particles include OG502-31 manufactured by Clariant Co.
The metal oxide particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 硬化膜中における金属酸化物粒子の含有量は特に制限されず、カラーフィルタの剥がれがより抑制される点で、硬化膜全質量に対して、5~85質量%が好ましく、5~80質量%がより好ましい。特に、より一層カラーフィルタの剥がれが抑制される点で、50~77質量%がさらに好ましく、60~75質量%が特に好ましい。 The content of the metal oxide particles in the cured film is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the cured film in terms of further suppressing peeling of the color filter. Is more preferable. In particular, 50 to 77% by mass is more preferable, and 60 to 75% by mass is particularly preferable in that peeling of the color filter is further suppressed.
 硬化膜の厚みは特に制限されず、カラーフィルタの剥がれがより抑制される点で、5~500nmが好ましく、20~450nmがより好ましく、50~400nmがさらに好ましい。 The thickness of the cured film is not particularly limited, and is preferably from 5 to 500 nm, more preferably from 20 to 450 nm, and even more preferably from 50 to 400 nm, from the viewpoint of further suppressing peeling of the color filter.
 硬化膜は、カラーフィルタの密着性の点から、屈折率が1.85~2.60であることが好ましく、1.90~2.60であることがより好ましい。
 硬化膜の屈折率が1.85~2.60であるという物性は、後述する(B)高分子分散剤を含有することにより好適に達成し得るが、更にどのような手段によって達成されてもよい。例えば、後述する(C)重合性化合物や、更に添加され得るバインダーポリマーの種類及び含有量の調整することや、金属酸化物粒子の種類及び含有量の調整することによってもより確実に達成され得る。
The cured film preferably has a refractive index of 1.85 to 2.60, more preferably 1.90 to 2.60, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the color filter.
The physical property that the refractive index of the cured film is 1.85 to 2.60 can be suitably achieved by containing a polymer dispersant (B) described later, but it can be achieved by any means. Good. For example, it can be achieved more reliably by adjusting the type and content of the polymerizable compound (C) described later and the binder polymer that can be further added, and adjusting the type and content of the metal oxide particles. .
(硬化膜の製造方法)
 硬化膜の製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を採用できる。例えば、上述した金属酸化物粒子を含む硬化膜形成用組成物を、支持体上に塗布して、必要に応じて硬化処理(例えば、加熱処理及び/又は露光処理)を実施する方法を採用できる。
 塗布の方法は特に制限されず、スプレー法、ロールコート法、回転塗布法(スピンコート法)、バー塗布法などが挙げられる。
 なお、硬化膜形成用組成物には、後述するように金属酸化物粒子以外の成分が含まれていてもよい。例えば、後述する高分子分散剤、重合性化合物、溶媒などが挙げられる。
(Method for producing cured film)
The manufacturing method in particular of a cured film is not restrict | limited, A well-known method is employable. For example, a method of applying the cured film-forming composition containing the metal oxide particles described above onto a support and performing a curing treatment (for example, a heat treatment and / or an exposure treatment) as necessary can be employed. .
The coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a spray method, a roll coating method, a spin coating method (spin coating method), and a bar coating method.
In addition, components other than metal oxide particles may be contained in the composition for forming a cured film as described later. For example, a polymer dispersant, a polymerizable compound, a solvent and the like which will be described later are included.
 また、硬化膜形成用組成物は、透明な組成物であることが好ましく、より具体的には、組成物により膜厚1.0μmの硬化膜を形成した時、硬化膜の厚み方向に対する光透過率が、400~700nmの波長領域全域に渡って90%以上となるような組成物であることが好ましい。
 すなわち、硬化膜(透明膜)は、膜厚1.0μmにおいて、膜の厚み方向に対する光透過率が、400~700nmの波長領域全域に渡って90%以上となるような膜が好ましい。
 このような光透過率の物性はどのような手段によって達成されてもよいが、例えば、硬化膜形成用組成物に後述する(C)重合性化合物や、さらに添加され得る(I)バインダーポリマーの種類及び含有量の調整することにより、好適に達成される。また、(A)金属酸化物粒子の粒子径や、後述する(B)高分子分散剤の種類及び添加量を調整することによっても、上記光透過率の物性を好適に達成できる。
The cured film forming composition is preferably a transparent composition. More specifically, when a cured film having a thickness of 1.0 μm is formed from the composition, light transmission in the thickness direction of the cured film is achieved. It is preferable that the composition has a rate of 90% or more over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm.
That is, the cured film (transparent film) is preferably a film having a light transmittance of 90% or more over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm when the film thickness is 1.0 μm.
Such physical properties of light transmittance may be achieved by any means. For example, (C) a polymerizable compound, which will be described later, or (I) a binder polymer that can be further added to the composition for forming a cured film. It is suitably achieved by adjusting the type and content. Further, the physical properties of the light transmittance can be suitably achieved also by adjusting the particle diameter of (A) metal oxide particles and the type and addition amount of (B) polymer dispersant described later.
 なお、上記光透過率は、400~700nmの波長領域全域に渡って、95%以上であることが好ましく、99%以上であることがより好ましく、100%であることが最も好ましい。
 硬化膜形成用組成物は、実質的には、着色剤を含有しないことが好ましい。より具体的には、着色剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0質量%であることが好ましい。
The light transmittance is preferably 95% or more, more preferably 99% or more, and most preferably 100% over the entire wavelength region of 400 to 700 nm.
It is preferable that the composition for forming a cured film does not substantially contain a colorant. More specifically, the content of the colorant is preferably 0% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
(その他の任意成分)
 硬化膜又は硬化膜形成用組成物には、上述した金属酸化物粒子以外の成分が含まれていてもよい。例えば、(B)高分子分散剤、(C)重合性化合物、(D)溶媒、(E)重合開始剤、(F)増感剤、(G)共増感剤、(H)重合禁止剤、(I)バインダーポリマー、(J)界面活性剤などが挙げられる。特に、硬化膜には、上記(B)高分子分散剤、(I)バインダーポリマー、(J)界面活性剤などが含まれることが好ましい。
 以下に、各成分について詳述する。
(Other optional ingredients)
Components other than the metal oxide particles described above may be contained in the cured film or the composition for forming a cured film. For example, (B) polymer dispersant, (C) polymerizable compound, (D) solvent, (E) polymerization initiator, (F) sensitizer, (G) co-sensitizer, (H) polymerization inhibitor , (I) binder polymer, (J) surfactant and the like. In particular, the cured film preferably contains the (B) polymer dispersant, (I) binder polymer, (J) surfactant, and the like.
Below, each component is explained in full detail.
((B)高分子分散剤)
 硬化膜には、高分子分散剤が含まれていてもよい。なお、硬化膜に高分子分散剤を含有させる方法としては、上述した硬化膜形成用組成物に高分子分散剤を含有させる方法がある。
((B) polymer dispersant)
The cured film may contain a polymer dispersant. In addition, as a method of making a cured film contain a polymer dispersing agent, there exists the method of containing a polymeric dispersant in the composition for cured film formation mentioned above.
 高分子分散剤の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、一般的な高分子分散剤(以後、適宜、分散樹脂とも称する)〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン等を挙げることができる。
 これら分散樹脂は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
The type of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited. For example, a general polymer dispersant (hereinafter also referred to as a dispersion resin as appropriate) [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight Saturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic copolymer, naphthalene sulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, etc. be able to.
These dispersion resins can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
 分散樹脂は、金属酸化物粒子の表面に吸着し、再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、金属酸化物粒子表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子が好ましい構造として挙げることができる。
 一方で、分散樹脂は、金属酸化物粒子表面を改質することで、分散樹脂の吸着を促進させる効果を有する。
The dispersion resin is adsorbed on the surface of the metal oxide particles and acts to prevent reaggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer having an anchor site to the surface of the metal oxide particles can be cited as preferred structures.
On the other hand, the dispersion resin has an effect of promoting adsorption of the dispersion resin by modifying the surface of the metal oxide particles.
 分散樹脂の具体例としては、BYK Chemie社製「DISPERBYK101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110、180(酸性基を含む共重合物)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050、4010、4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330、4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400、4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファィンテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、ルーブリゾール社製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、17000、27000(末端部に機能部を有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト型高分子)」、日光ケミカル社製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」等が挙げられる。
 これらの樹脂は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
Specific examples of the dispersion resin include “DISPERBYK101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110, 180 (copolymer containing an acid group), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, manufactured by BYK Chemie. 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050, 4010, 4165 (polyurethane system), manufactured by EFKA, EFKA 4330, 4340 (block copolymer), 4400, 4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyester amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo) Pigment derivative) ”,“ Ajisper PB821, PB822 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fintechno Co., Ltd.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) ”manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.,“ Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) ”, manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. “Dispalon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyetherester), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725”, “Demol RN manufactured by Kao Corporation , N (naphthalene sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate) ”,“ homogenol L-18 (polymer polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ Emulgen 920, 930 ” , 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether) "," acetamine 86 (su Allylamine acetate) ”, Lubrizol Corporation“ Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (polymer having a functional part at the end), 24000, 28000 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) ”,“ Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) ”manufactured by Nikko Chemical Co., Ltd., and the like.
These resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 分散樹脂の好適態様の一つとしては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する基Xを有する繰り返し単位と、側鎖に原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yとを有し、かつ塩基性窒素原子を含有する樹脂(B1)が挙げられる。
 pKa14以下の官能基を有する基X、及び、原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの詳細については、後述する。
 塩基性窒素原子とは、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はないが、樹脂(B1)がpKb14以下の窒素原子を有する構造を含有することが好ましく、pKb10以下の窒素原子を有する構造を含有することがより好ましい。
 塩基強度pKbとは、水温25℃でのpKbをいい、塩基の強さを定量的に表すための指標のひとつであり、塩基性度定数と同義である。塩基強度pKbと、後述の酸強度pKaとは、pKb=14-pKaの関係にある。
As a preferred embodiment of the dispersion resin, a repeating unit having a group X having a functional group of pKa 14 or less, an oligomer chain or a polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms in the side chain, and a base Resin (B1) containing a reactive nitrogen atom.
Details of the group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less and the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms will be described later.
The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a basic nitrogen atom, but the resin (B1) preferably contains a structure having a nitrogen atom of pKb14 or less, and a structure having a nitrogen atom of pKb10 or less. It is more preferable to contain.
The base strength pKb refers to pKb at a water temperature of 25 ° C., and is one of the indexes for quantitatively representing the strength of the base, and is synonymous with the basicity constant. The base strength pKb and the acid strength pKa described later have a relationship of pKb = 14−pKa.
 上記樹脂(B1)は、pKa14以下の官能基を有する基Xが結合する窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位と、側鎖に原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yとを有する樹脂(B2)であることが好ましい。
 樹脂(B1)は、(i)ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)系繰り返し単位、ポリアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、ポリジアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、メタキシレンジアミン-エピクロルヒドリン重縮合物系繰り返し単位、及びポリビニルアミン系繰り返し単位から選択される少なくとも1種の、窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位であって、窒素原子に結合し、かつpKa14以下の官能基を有する基Xを有する繰り返し単位と、側鎖に(ii)原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yとを有する樹脂(以下、適宜、「特定樹脂」と称する)であることが特に好ましい。なお、ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)における低級とは炭素数が1~5であることを示し、低級アルキレンイミンとは炭素数1~5のアルキレンイミンを表す。
 さらに、本発明の特定樹脂は、一般式(I-1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(I-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有する構造を含むことが好ましい。
The resin (B1) is a resin having a repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom to which a group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less is bonded, and an oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms in the side chain ( B2) is preferred.
Resin (B1) is composed of (i) a poly (lower alkyleneimine) -based repeating unit, a polyallylamine-based repeating unit, a polydiallylamine-based repeating unit, a metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating unit, and a polyvinylamine-based repeating unit. At least one selected repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom, the repeating unit having a group X bonded to the nitrogen atom and having a functional group of pKa14 or less, and (ii) 40 atoms in the side chain A resin having ˜10,000 oligomer chains or polymer chains Y (hereinafter appropriately referred to as “specific resin”) is particularly preferable. In the poly (lower alkyleneimine), “lower” means 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and “lower alkyleneimine” means an alkyleneimine having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
Furthermore, the specific resin of the present invention preferably includes a structure having a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-1) and a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 上記一般式(I-1)及び(I-2)中、R101及びR102は、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子又はアルキル基を表す。aは、各々独立に、1~5の整数を表す。*は繰り返し単位間の連結部を表す。
 XはpKa14以下の官能基を有する基を表す。
 Yは原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖を表す。
 本発明の特定樹脂は、一般式(I-1)又は一般式(I-2)で表される繰り返し単位に加えて、さらに一般式(I-3)で表される繰り返し単位を共重合成分として有することが好ましい。このような繰り返し単位を併用することで、この樹脂を金属酸化物粒子(A)の分散剤として用いたときにさらに分散性能が向上する。
In the general formulas (I-1) and (I-2), R 101 and R 102 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom or an alkyl group. a independently represents an integer of 1 to 5; * Represents a connecting part between repeating units.
X represents a group having a functional group of pKa14 or less.
Y represents an oligomer chain or a polymer chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms.
The specific resin of the present invention comprises a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-1) or (I-2). It is preferable to have as. By using such a repeating unit in combination, the dispersion performance is further improved when this resin is used as a dispersant for the metal oxide particles (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 上記一般式(I-3)中、*、R101、R102及びaは一般式(I-1)と同義である。
 Y’はアニオン基を有する原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖を表す。
 上記一般式(I-3)で表される繰り返し単位は、主鎖部に一級又は二級アミノ基を有する樹脂に、アミンと反応して塩を形成する基を有するオリゴマー又はポリマーを添加して反応させることで形成することが可能である。ここで、アニオン基としては、CO2 -又はSO3 -が好ましく、CO2 -が最も好ましい。アニオン基は、Y’が有するオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖の末端位にあることが好ましい。
 一般式(I-1)、一般式(I-2)及び一般式(I-3)において、R101及びR102は特に水素原子であることが好ましい。aは2であることが原料入手の観点から好ましい。
In the general formula (I-3), *, R 101 , R 102 and a have the same meaning as in the general formula (I-1).
Y ′ represents an oligomer chain or polymer chain having an anion group and having 40 to 10,000 atoms.
The repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) is obtained by adding an oligomer or polymer having a group that reacts with an amine to form a salt to a resin having a primary or secondary amino group in the main chain portion. It can be formed by reacting. Here, as the anionic group, CO 2 - or SO 3 - is preferable, and CO 2 - is most preferable. The anionic group is preferably at the terminal position of the oligomer chain or polymer chain of Y ′.
In general formula (I-1), general formula (I-2) and general formula (I-3), R 101 and R 102 are particularly preferably hydrogen atoms. a is preferably 2 from the viewpoint of obtaining raw materials.
 一般式(I-1)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、保存安定性・現像性の観点から、特定樹脂に含まれる全繰り返し単位中、1~80モル%が好ましく、3~50モル%が最も好ましい。
 一般式(I-2)で表される繰り返し単位の含有量は、保存安定性の観点から、特定樹脂の全繰り返し単位中、10~90モル%が好ましく、30~70モル%が最も好ましい。
 両者の含有比について検討するに、分散安定性及び親疎水性のバランスの観点からは、繰り返し単位(I-1):(I-2)はモル比で10:1~1:100の範囲であることが好ましく、1:1~1:10の範囲であることがより好ましい。
The content of the repeating unit represented by formula (I-1) is preferably 1 to 80 mol% in all repeating units contained in the specific resin from the viewpoint of storage stability and developability, and 3 to 50 mol. % Is most preferred.
From the viewpoint of storage stability, the content of the repeating unit represented by formula (I-2) is preferably 10 to 90 mol%, and most preferably 30 to 70 mol%, based on all repeating units of the specific resin.
In examining the content ratio of both, from the viewpoint of the balance between dispersion stability and hydrophilicity / hydrophobicity, the repeating unit (I-1) :( I-2) is in the range of 10: 1 to 1: 100 in molar ratio. Preferably, the range is from 1: 1 to 1:10.
 なお、所望により併用される一般式(I-3)で表される繰り返し単位は原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖を含む部分構造が、主鎖の窒素原子にイオン的に結合しているものであり、特定樹脂の全繰り返し単位中、効果の観点からは、0.5~20モル%含有することが好ましく、1~10モル%含有することが最も好ましい。
 なお、ポリマー鎖Yがイオン的に結合していることは、赤外分光法や塩基滴定により確認できる。
The repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) used in combination optionally has a partial structure containing an oligomer chain or a polymer chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms ionically bonded to the nitrogen atom of the main chain. In view of the effect, the content is preferably 0.5 to 20 mol%, and most preferably 1 to 10 mol% in all repeating units of the specific resin.
In addition, it can confirm that the polymer chain Y has couple | bonded ionically by infrared spectroscopy or base titration.
(pKa14以下の官能基を有する基X)
 基Xは水温25℃でのpKaが14以下の官能基を有する。ここでいう「pKa」とは、化学便覧(II)(改訂4版、1993年、日本化学会編、丸善株式会社)に記載されている定義のものである。
 「pKa14以下の官能基」は、物性がこの条件を満たすものであれば、その構造などは特に限定されず、公知の官能基でpKaが上記範囲を満たすものが挙げられるが、特にpKaが12以下である官能基が好ましく、pKaが11以下である官能基が最も好ましい。具体的には、例えば、カルボン酸(pKa 3~5程度)、スルホン酸(pKa -3~-2程度)、ホスホン酸(pKa -1~4程度)、-COCH2CO-(pKa 8~10程度)、-COCH2CN(pKa 8~11程度)、-CONHCO-、フェノール性水酸基、-RFCH2OH又は-(RF)2CHOH(RFはペルフルオロアルキル基を表す。pKa 9~11程度)、スルホンアミド基(pKa 9~11程度)等が挙げられ、特にカルボン酸(pKa 3~5程度)、スルホン酸(pKa -3~-2程度)、-COCH2CO-(pKa 8~10程度)が好ましい。
 基Xが有する官能基のpKaが14以下であることにより、金属酸化物粒子とのより強固な相互作用を達成することができる。
 このpKa14以下の官能基を有する基Xは、窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位における窒素原子に直接結合することが好ましいが、窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位の窒素原子とXとは、共有結合のみならず、イオン結合して塩を形成する態様で連結していてもよい。
(Group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less)
The group X has a functional group having a pKa of 14 or less at a water temperature of 25 ° C. Here, “pKa” has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
The “functional group of pKa14 or less” is not particularly limited as long as the physical properties satisfy this condition, and examples thereof include those having a pKa satisfying the above range with known functional groups. The following functional groups are preferred, and those having a pKa of 11 or less are most preferred. Specifically, for example, carboxylic acid (about pKa 3 to 5), sulfonic acid (about pKa -3 to -2), phosphonic acid (about pKa -1 to 4), -COCH 2 CO- (pKa 8 to 10) About), —COCH 2 CN (about pKa 8 to 11), —CONHCO—, phenolic hydroxyl group, —RFCH 2 OH or — (RF) 2 CHOH (RF represents a perfluoroalkyl group; about pKa 9 to 11), Sulfonamide groups (pKa of about 9 to 11) and the like, and in particular carboxylic acid (pKa of about 3 to 5), sulfonic acid (pKa of about 3 to -2), —COCH 2 CO— (pKa of about 8 to 10) Is preferred.
When pKa of the functional group which group X has is 14 or less, stronger interaction with metal oxide particles can be achieved.
The group X having a functional group of pKa14 or less is preferably directly bonded to the nitrogen atom in the repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom. However, if the nitrogen atom and X in the repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom are only covalent bonds, Instead, they may be linked in such a manner that a salt is formed by ionic bonding.
 本発明におけるpKa14以下の官能基を含有する基Xとしては、特に一般式(V-1)、一般式(V-2)又は一般式(V-3)で表される構造を有するものが好ましい。 As the group X containing a functional group of pKa14 or less in the present invention, those having a structure represented by general formula (V-1), general formula (V-2) or general formula (V-3) are particularly preferable. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 上記一般式(V-1)、一般式(V-2)中、Uは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。d及びeは、それぞれ独立して0又は1を表す。上記一般式(V-3)中、Qはアシル基又はアルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Uで表される2価の連結基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(より具体的には、例えば、-CH2-、-CH2CH2-、-CH2CHMe-、-(CH25-、-CH2CH(n-C1021)-等)、酸素を含有するアルキレン基(より具体的には、例えば、-CH2OCH2-、-CH2CH2OCH2CH2-等)、アリーレン基(例えば、フェニレン基、トリレン基、ビフェニレン基、ナフチレン基、フラニレン基、ピロリレン基等)、アルキレンオキシ基(例えば、エチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基、フェニレンオキシ基等)等が挙げられるが、特に炭素数1~30のアルキレン基又は炭素数6~20のアリーレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~20のアルキレン基又は炭素数6~15のアリーレン基が最も好ましい。
 また、生産性の観点から、dは1が好ましく、また、eは0が好ましい。
 Qはアシル基又はアルコキシカルボニル基を表す。Qにおけるアシル基としては、炭素数1~30のアシル基(例えば、ホルミル基、アセチル基、n-プロパノイル基、ベンゾイル基等)が好ましく、特にアセチルが好ましい。Qにおけるアルコキシカルボニル基としては、炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニル基(例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、n-プロポキシカルボニル基等)が好ましい。Qは、特にアシル基が好ましく、アセチル基が製造のし易さ、原料の入手性の観点から好ましい。
In the general formulas (V-1) and (V-2), U represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. d and e each independently represents 0 or 1; In the general formula (V-3), Q represents an acyl group or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
Examples of the divalent linking group represented by U include an alkylene group (more specifically, for example, —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 CHMe—, — (CH 2 ) 5 -, -CH 2 CH (n-C 10 H 21 )-, etc.), an alkylene group containing oxygen (more specifically, for example, -CH 2 OCH 2- , -CH 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2- Etc.), arylene groups (for example, phenylene group, tolylene group, biphenylene group, naphthylene group, furylene group, pyrrolylene group, etc.), alkyleneoxy groups (for example, ethyleneoxy group, propyleneoxy group, phenyleneoxy group, etc.) However, an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an arylene group having 6 to 15 carbon atoms is most preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of productivity, d is preferably 1, and e is preferably 0.
Q represents an acyl group or an alkoxycarbonyl group. The acyl group in Q is preferably an acyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a formyl group, an acetyl group, an n-propanoyl group, a benzoyl group), and particularly preferably acetyl. The alkoxycarbonyl group in Q is preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, an n-propoxycarbonyl group, etc.). Q is particularly preferably an acyl group, and an acetyl group is preferred from the viewpoint of ease of production and availability of raw materials.
(原子数40~10,000のオリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Y)
 オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yとしては、特定樹脂の主鎖部と連結できるポリエステル、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリ(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等の公知のポリマー鎖が挙げられる。オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの特定樹脂との結合部位は、オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの末端であることが好ましい。
 オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yは、ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)系繰り返し単位、ポリアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、ポリジアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、メタキシレンジアミン-エピクロルヒドリン重縮合物系繰り返し単位、及びポリビニルアミン系繰り返し単位から選択される少なくとも1種の窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位の窒素原子と結合していることが好ましい。ポリ(低級アルキレンイミン)系繰り返し単位、ポリアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、ポリジアリルアミン系繰り返し単位、メタキシレンジアミン-エピクロルヒドリン重縮合物系繰り返し単位、及びポリビニルアミン系繰り返し単位から選択される少なくとも1種の窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位などの主鎖部と、オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yとの結合様式は、共有結合、イオン結合、又は、共有結合及びイオン結合の混合である。オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yと主鎖部の結合様式の比率は、共有結合:イオン結合=100:0~0:100であるが、95:5~5:95が好ましく、90:10~10:90が最も好ましい。この範囲外であると、分散性・分散安定性が悪化し、且つ溶剤溶解性が低くなる。
 オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yは、窒素原子を含有する繰り返し単位の窒素原子とアミド結合、又はカルボン酸塩としてイオン結合していることが好ましい。
(Oligomer chain or polymer chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms)
Examples of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y include known polymer chains such as polyester, polyamide, polyimide, and poly (meth) acrylate that can be connected to the main chain portion of the specific resin. The binding site of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y with the specific resin is preferably the terminal of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y.
The oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is selected from poly (lower alkylene imine) -based repeating units, polyallylamine-based repeating units, polydiallylamine-based repeating units, metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating units, and polyvinylamine-based repeating units. It is preferably bonded to a nitrogen atom of a repeating unit containing at least one nitrogen atom. At least one nitrogen atom selected from a poly (lower alkyleneimine) -based repeating unit, a polyallylamine-based repeating unit, a polydiallylamine-based repeating unit, a metaxylenediamine-epichlorohydrin polycondensate-based repeating unit, and a polyvinylamine-based repeating unit The bonding mode between the main chain portion such as a repeating unit containing benzene and the oligomer chain or the polymer chain Y is a covalent bond, an ionic bond, or a mixture of a covalent bond and an ionic bond. The ratio of the bonding mode between the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y and the main chain is covalent bond: ionic bond = 100: 0 to 0: 100, preferably 95: 5 to 5:95, and 90:10 to 10: 90 is most preferred. Outside this range, the dispersibility / dispersion stability deteriorates and the solvent solubility decreases.
The oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is preferably ionically bonded as a amide bond or carboxylate with a nitrogen atom of a repeating unit containing a nitrogen atom.
 オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの原子数としては、分散性・分散安定性・現像性の観点から、50~5,000であることが好ましく、60~3,000であることがより好ましい。また、オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの数平均分子量はGPC法によるポリスチレン換算値により測定することができる。オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yの数平均分子量は、特に1,000~50,000が好ましく、1,000~30,000が分散性・分散安定性・現像性の観点から最も好ましい。 The number of atoms of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is preferably 50 to 5,000, more preferably 60 to 3,000, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, dispersion stability, and developability. Further, the number average molecular weight of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y can be measured by a polystyrene conversion value by GPC method. The number average molecular weight of the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y is particularly preferably 1,000 to 50,000, and most preferably 1,000 to 30,000 from the viewpoint of dispersibility, dispersion stability, and developability.
 特に、オリゴマー鎖又はポリマー鎖Yは一般式(III-1)で表される構造を有するものが好ましい。また、特定樹脂が一般式(I-3)又は(II-3)で表される繰り返し単位を含有する場合、Y’が一般式(III-2)であることが好ましい。一般式(III-2)中、Zは一般式(III-1)のZと同義である。 In particular, the oligomer chain or polymer chain Y preferably has a structure represented by the general formula (III-1). In addition, when the specific resin contains a repeating unit represented by the general formula (I-3) or (II-3), Y ′ is preferably the general formula (III-2). In general formula (III-2), Z has the same meaning as Z in general formula (III-1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 特定樹脂の具体例としては、特開2012-255148号公報の段落[0075]~[0084]で例示される樹脂が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the specific resin include resins exemplified in paragraphs [0075] to [0084] of JP2012-255148A.
 高分子分散剤の他の好適態様としては、重量平均分子量10000以下の下記一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物が挙げられる。 Another preferred embodiment of the polymer dispersant includes a polymer compound represented by the following general formula (1) having a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 R1は、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。R2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。A1は、炭化水素基、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、複素環基(複素環構造を有する基)、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基及び水酸基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基(以後、単に置換基A1とも称する)を表す。n個のA1及びR2は、それぞれ同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 mは8以下の正の数、nは1~9を表し、m+nは3~10を満たす。
 P1はポリマー鎖を表す。m個のP1は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. A 1 is a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a heterocyclic group (a group having a heterocyclic structure), an alkyloxycarbonyl group A monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of alkylaminocarbonyl group, imide group, carboxylate group, sulfonamido group, alkoxysilyl group, epoxy group, isocyanate group and hydroxyl group (hereinafter simply Represents the substituent A 1 ). The n A 1 and R 2 may be the same or different.
m represents a positive number of 8 or less, n represents 1 to 9, and m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
P 1 represents a polymer chain. The m P 1 may be the same or different.
 高分子化合物が有する、置換基Aは金属酸化物粒子と相互作用することができるので、高分子化合物はn個(1~9個)の置換基A1を有することにより金属酸化物粒子と強固に相互作用することができる。また、高分子化合物がm個有するポリマー鎖P1は立体反発基として機能することができ、m個有することにより良好な立体反発力を発揮して金属酸化物粒子を均一に分散することができる。さらに、高分子化合物は分子構造的に、従来のグラフトランダム構造の分散剤で生じ得た粒子間架橋による粒子の凝集などの弊害が生じることもないものと推定される。 Since the substituent A 1 possessed by the polymer compound can interact with the metal oxide particles, the polymer compound has n (1 to 9) substituents A 1 to form the metal oxide particles. Can interact strongly. In addition, m polymer chains P 1 of the polymer compound can function as a steric repulsion group, and by having the m number, the polymer compound can exhibit a favorable steric repulsion force and uniformly disperse the metal oxide particles. . Further, it is presumed that the high molecular compound does not cause adverse effects such as aggregation of particles due to cross-linking between particles, which can be generated by a conventional dispersant having a graft random structure.
 一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物の重量平均分子量は、10000以下であり、8000以下であることが好ましい。
 重量平均分子量が大きすぎると、分散組成物(硬化膜形成用組成物)中の金属酸化物粒子(A)-高分子分散剤(B)複合体の粒径が大きくなり、得られる膜において粒子同士が密にならず、屈折率を高めることが難しいものと考えられる。一方、重量平均分子量を上記範囲とすることにより金属酸化物粒子(A)-高分子分散剤(B)複合体の粒径を小さく抑えることができ、得られる膜において粒子同士が密になり、屈折率を高めることができるものと考えられる。また、理由は定かではないが、上記範囲とすることにより分散性も向上させることができ、粘度を低減できるものと考えられる。
 なお、重量平均分子量の下限値としては特に制限はないが、分散剤としての機能を発揮し、ひいては本発明の効果をより確実に達成する観点から、1000以上であることが好ましく、3000以上であることがより好ましい。
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) is 10,000 or less, and preferably 8000 or less.
If the weight average molecular weight is too large, the particle size of the metal oxide particle (A) -polymer dispersant (B) complex in the dispersion composition (cured film forming composition) becomes large, and the particles in the resulting film It is considered that it is difficult to increase the refractive index because they are not dense. On the other hand, by setting the weight average molecular weight within the above range, the particle size of the metal oxide particle (A) -polymer dispersant (B) complex can be kept small, and the particles in the resulting film become dense, It is considered that the refractive index can be increased. Further, although the reason is not clear, it is considered that dispersibility can be improved and viscosity can be reduced by setting the above range.
The lower limit of the weight average molecular weight is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1000 or more from the viewpoint of exhibiting the function as a dispersant and more reliably achieving the effects of the present invention. More preferably.
 以下、一般式(1)における各基について詳細に説明する。
 A1は、炭化水素基、酸性基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基及び水酸基のような金属酸化物粒子(A)に対する吸着能を有する官能基、複素環構造のような金属酸化物粒子(A)に対する吸着能を有し得る構造を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基を表す。
 なお、以下、この金属酸化物粒子(A)に対する吸着能を有する部位(上記官能基及び構造)を、適宜、「吸着部位」と総称して、説明する。
Hereinafter, each group in General formula (1) is demonstrated in detail.
A 1 is a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, an imide group, a carboxylate group , Sulfonamide group, alkoxysilyl group, epoxy group, isocyanate group, functional group having adsorption ability for metal oxide particles (A) such as hydroxyl group, adsorption ability for metal oxide particles (A) such as heterocyclic structure Represents a monovalent substituent having at least one structure which may have
Hereinafter, the site having the ability to adsorb to the metal oxide particles (A) (the functional group and the structure) will be collectively referred to as “adsorption site” as appropriate.
 吸着部位は、1つのA1の中に、少なくとも1個含まれていればよく、2個以上を含んでいてもよい。
 また、1つのAの中に、2個以上の吸着部位が含まれる態様としては、鎖状飽和炭化水素基(直鎖状でも分岐状であってもよく、炭素数1~10であることが好ましい)、環状飽和炭化水素基(炭素数3~10であることが好ましい)、芳香族基(炭素数5~10であることが好ましく、例えば、フェニレン基)等を介して2個以上の吸着部位が結合し1価の置換基Aを形成する態様等が挙げられ、鎖状飽和炭化水素基を介して2個以上の吸着部位が結合し1価の置換基Aを形成する態様が好ましい。なお、吸着部位自体が1価の置換基を構成する場合には、吸着部位そのものがA1で表される1価の置換基であってもよい。
 まず、Aを構成する吸着部位について以下に説明する。
As long as at least one adsorption site is included in one A 1 , two or more adsorption sites may be included.
In addition, as an aspect in which two or more adsorption sites are included in one A 1 , a chain saturated hydrocarbon group (which may be linear or branched and has 1 to 10 carbon atoms) 2) or more, via a cyclic saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), an aromatic group (preferably having 5 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a phenylene group) or the like. An embodiment in which the adsorption site is bonded to form a monovalent substituent A 1 is exemplified, and an embodiment in which two or more adsorption sites are bonded through a chain saturated hydrocarbon group to form a monovalent substituent A 1 Is preferred. In the case where the adsorption site itself constitutes a monovalent substituent, the adsorption site itself may be a monovalent substituent represented by A 1 .
First, the adsorption site constituting A 1 will be described below.
 上記「炭化水素基」としては、脂肪族炭化水素基、又は、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。なかでも、炭素数1~20の基が好ましく、炭素数1~10の基がより好ましい。 The above “hydrocarbon group” includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Of these, a group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and a group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is more preferable.
 上記「酸性基」として、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、モノ硫酸エステル基、リン酸基、モノリン酸エステル基、ホウ酸基が好ましい例として挙げられ、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、モノ硫酸エステル基、リン酸基、モノリン酸エステル基、ホスホン酸基、ホスフィン酸基がより好ましく、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、ホスホン酸基、ホスフィン酸基が更に好ましく、カルボン酸基が特に好ましい。 Preferred examples of the “acidic group” include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a monosulfate group, a phosphoric acid group, a monophosphate group, and a boric acid group. Sulfuric acid ester groups, phosphoric acid groups, monophosphoric acid ester groups, phosphonic acid groups, and phosphinic acid groups are more preferred, carboxylic acid groups, sulfonic acid groups, phosphoric acid groups, phosphonic acid groups, and phosphinic acid groups are more preferred, and carboxylic acid groups. Is particularly preferred.
 上記「ウレア基」として、例えば、-NR15CONR1617(ここで、R15、R16、及びR17は各々独立に、水素原子、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が好ましい例として挙げられ、-NR15CONHR17(ここで、R15及びR17は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)がより好ましく、-NHCONHR17(ここで、R17は、水素原子、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)が特に好ましい。 Examples of the “urea group” include —NR 15 CONR 16 R 17 (where R 15 , R 16 , and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number of 6 The above aryl group or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms may be mentioned as a preferred example, and —NR 15 CONHR 17 (wherein R 15 and R 17 are each independently a hydrogen atom, 1 carbon atom) More preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), and —NHCONHR 17 (wherein R 17 represents a hydrogen atom, An alkyl group of up to 10, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms is particularly preferred.
 上記「ウレタン基」として、例えば、-NHCOOR18、-NR19COOR20、-OCONHR21、-OCONR2223(ここで、R18、R19、R20、R21、R22及びR23は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)などが好ましい例として挙げられ、-NHCOOR18、-OCONHR21(ここで、R18及びR21は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)などがより好ましく、-NHCOOR18、-OCONHR21(ここで、R18及びR21は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)などが特に好ましい。 Examples of the “urethane group” include —NHCOOR 18 , —NR 19 COOR 20 , —OCONHR 21 , —OCONR 22 R 23 (where R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 and R 23 are And each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.) And the like, and —NHCOOR 18 , —OCONHR 21 ( Here, R 18 and R 21 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms. NHCOOR 18, -OCONHR 21 (wherein, R 18 and R 21 are each independently an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having 6 or more aryl group carbon atoms or the number of 7 or more a carbon It represents an alkyl group.) And the like are particularly preferred.
 上記「配位性酸素原子を有する基」としては、例えば、アセチルアセトナト基、クラウンエーテルなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the “group having a coordinating oxygen atom” include acetylacetonato group, crown ether and the like.
 また、上記「塩基性窒素原子を有する基」として、例えば、アミノ基(-NH2)、置換イミノ基(-NHR8、-NR910、ここで、R8、R9、及びR10は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。)、下記式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基、下記式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基などが好ましい例として挙げられる。 Examples of the “group having a basic nitrogen atom” include an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 Each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms), a guanidyl group represented by the following formula (a1), Preferred examples include an amidinyl group represented by the following formula (a2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式(a1)中、R11及びR12は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。
 式(a2)中、R13及びR14は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、炭素数6以上のアリール基、又は、炭素数7以上のアラルキル基を表す。
In formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
In formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or more carbon atoms, or an aralkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
 これらの中でも、アミノ基(-NH2)、置換イミノ基(-NHR8、-NR910、ここで、R8、R9、及びR10は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。)、式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基〔式(a1)中、R11及びR12は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕、式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基〔式(a2)中、R13及びR14は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から10までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕などがより好ましい。
 特に、アミノ基(-NH2)、置換イミノ基(-NHR8、-NR910、ここで、R8、R9、及びR10は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から5までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。)、式(a1)で表されるグアニジル基〔式(a1)中、R11及びR12は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から5までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又はベンジル基を表す。〕、式(a2)で表されるアミジニル基〔式(a2)中、R13及びR14は、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1から5までのアルキル基、フェニル基、又は、ベンジル基を表す。〕などが好ましく用いられる。
 上記「アルキルオキシカルボニル基」におけるアルキル基部分としては、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基であることが好ましく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記「アルキルアミノカルボニル基」におけるアルキル基部分としては、炭素数1から20までのアルキル基であることが好ましく、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等が挙げられる。
 上記「カルボン酸塩基」としては、カルボン酸のアンモニウム塩からなる基などが挙げられる。
 上記「スルホンアミド基」としては、窒素原子に結合する水素原子がアルキル基(メチル基等)、アシル基(アセチル基、トリフルオロアセチル基など)等で置換されていてもよい。
Among these, an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. A guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 each independently represent from 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Represents an alkyl group, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ] An amidinyl group represented by the formula (a2) [in the formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group or a benzyl group. ] Is more preferable.
In particular, an amino group (—NH 2 ), a substituted imino group (—NHR 8 , —NR 9 R 10 , wherein R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are each independently an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Group, a phenyl group or a benzyl group), a guanidyl group represented by the formula (a1) [in the formula (a1), R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Represents a group, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. ], In amidinyl group represented by Formula (a2) [Formula (a2), R 13 and R 14 each independently represent an alkyl group having from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, or a benzyl group. Etc. are preferably used.
The alkyl group moiety in the “alkyloxycarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group and an ethyl group.
The alkyl group moiety in the “alkylaminocarbonyl group” is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and examples thereof include a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group.
Examples of the “carboxylic acid group” include groups composed of ammonium salts of carboxylic acids.
In the “sulfonamide group”, a hydrogen atom bonded to a nitrogen atom may be substituted with an alkyl group (such as a methyl group) or an acyl group (such as an acetyl group or a trifluoroacetyl group).
 上記「複素環構造」としては、例えば、チオフェン、フラン、キサンテン、ピロール、ピロリン、ピロリジン、ジオキソラン、ピラゾール、ピラゾリン、ピラゾリジン、イミダゾール、オキサゾール、チアゾール、オキサジアゾール、トリアゾール、チアジアゾール、ピラン、ピリジン、ピペリジン、ジオキサン、モルホリン、ピリダジン、ピリミジン、ピペラジン、トリアジン、トリチアン、イソインドリン、イソインドリノン、ベンズイミダゾロン、ベンゾチアゾール、コハクイミド、フタルイミド、ナフタルイミド等のイミド基、ヒダントイン、インドール、キノリン、カルバゾール、アクリジン、アクリドン、アントラキノンが好ましい例として挙げられ、ピロリン、ピロリジン、ピラゾール、ピラゾリン、ピラゾリジン、イミダゾール、トリアゾール、ピリジン、ピペリジン、モルホリン、ピリダジン、ピリミジン、ピペラジン、トリアジン、イソインドリン、イソインドリノン、ベンズイミダゾロン、ベンゾチアゾール、ヒダントイン、カルバゾール、アクリジン、アクリドン、アントラキノンがより好ましい。
 上記「イミド基」としては、コハクイミド、フタルイミド、ナフタルイミド等が挙げられる。 
Examples of the “heterocyclic structure” include, for example, thiophene, furan, xanthene, pyrrole, pyrroline, pyrrolidine, dioxolane, pyrazole, pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, oxadiazole, triazole, thiadiazole, pyran, pyridine, piperidine , Imide groups such as dioxane, morpholine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, triazine, trithiane, isoindoline, isoindolinone, benzimidazolone, benzothiazole, succinimide, phthalimide, naphthalimide, hydantoin, indole, quinoline, carbazole, acridine, Preferred examples include acridone and anthraquinone, and pyrroline, pyrrolidine, pyrazole, pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, imidazo Le, triazole, pyridine, piperidine, morpholine, pyridazine, pyrimidine, piperazine, triazine, isoindoline, isoindolinone, benzimidazolone, benzothiazole, hydantoin, carbazole, acridine, acridone, anthraquinone are more preferable.
Examples of the “imide group” include succinimide, phthalimide, naphthalimide and the like.
 なお、上記「複素環構造」は、更に置換基を有していてもよく、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から20までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。ここで、これらの置換基は、下記の構造単位又は該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される連結基を介して複素環と結合していてもよい。 The “heterocyclic structure” may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, and acetoxy groups, methoxy groups, and ethoxy groups An alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as a halogen atom such as chlorine or bromine, an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, or a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, t- Examples thereof include carbonate ester groups such as butyl carbonate. Here, these substituents may be bonded to the heterocyclic ring through the following structural unit or a linking group constituted by combining the structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 上記「アルコキシシリル基」としては、モノアルコキシシリル基、ジアルコキシシリル基、トリアルコキシシリル基のいずれでもよいが、トリアルコキシシリル基であることが好ましく、例えば、トリメトキシシリル基、トリエトキシシリル基などが挙げられる。
 上記「エポキシ基」としては、置換又は無置換のオキシラン基(エチレンオキシド基)が挙げられる。エポキシ基としては、例えば、下記一般式(a3)で表すことができる。
The “alkoxysilyl group” may be any of monoalkoxysilyl group, dialkoxysilyl group and trialkoxysilyl group, but is preferably trialkoxysilyl group, for example, trimethoxysilyl group, triethoxysilyl group Etc.
Examples of the “epoxy group” include a substituted or unsubstituted oxirane group (ethylene oxide group). As an epoxy group, it can represent with the following general formula (a3), for example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 上記一般式(a3)中、REP1~REP3は各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基を表す。また、REP1とREP2、REP2とREP3は、互いに結合して環構造を形成していてもよい。*は連結手を表す。 In the general formula (a3), R EP1 to R EP3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group. R EP1 and R EP2 , R EP2 and R EP3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. * Represents a connecting hand.
 吸着部位と結合する連結基としては、単結合、又は、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、及び0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ連結基が好ましく、この有機連結基は、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
 この連結基の具体的な例として、下記の構造単位又は該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される基を挙げることができる。
The linking group bonded to the adsorption site may be a single bond or 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200. And a linking group consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms is preferred, and this organic linking group may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
Specific examples of this linking group include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 連結基が更なる置換基を有する場合、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。 When the linking group has a further substituent, examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, and a carbon group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms such as a phenyl group and a naphthyl group. C1-C6 alkoxy such as aryl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamide group, N-sulfonylamide group, acetoxy group, etc., C1-C6 acyloxy group, methoxy group, ethoxy group, etc. Groups, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, carbonate groups such as cyano group and t-butyl carbonate, etc. It is done.
 上記の中では、Aとして、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、スルホンアミド基、イミド基及び配位性酸素原子を有する基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましい。
 特に、金属酸化物粒子(A)との相互作用を良好にし、屈折率を向上し、かつ組成物の粘度を低減する観点から、A1は、pKa5以上の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることが好ましく、pKa5~14の官能基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基であることがより好ましい。
 ここでいう「pKa」とは、化学便覧(II)(改訂4版、1993年、日本化学会編、丸善株式会社)に記載されている定義のものである。
 上記pKa5以上の官能基としては、ウレア基、ウレタン基、スルホンアミド基、イミド基又は配位性酸素原子を有する基が挙げられる。
 具体的には、例えば、ウレア基(pKa 12~14程度)、ウレタン基(pKa 11~13程度)、配位性酸素原子を有する基としての-COCH2CO-(pKa 8~10程度)、スルホンアミド基(pKa 9~11程度)等が挙げられる。
Among the above, as A 1 , a monovalent substitution having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an acid group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group and a group having a coordinating oxygen atom It is preferably a group.
In particular, from the viewpoint of improving the interaction with the metal oxide particles (A), improving the refractive index, and reducing the viscosity of the composition, A 1 is a monovalent having at least one functional group of pKa5 or higher. And a monovalent substituent having at least one functional group of pKa5 to 14 is more preferable.
Here, “pKa” has the definition described in Chemical Handbook (II) (4th revised edition, 1993, edited by The Chemical Society of Japan, Maruzen Co., Ltd.).
Examples of the functional group of pKa5 or higher include a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group, or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom.
Specifically, for example, a urea group (about pKa 12 to 14), a urethane group (about pKa 11 to 13), —COCH 2 CO— (about pKa 8 to 10) as a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, Examples thereof include a sulfonamide group (about pKa 9 to 11).
 A1は、下記一般式(4)で表される1価の置換基として表されることが好ましい。 A 1 is preferably represented as a monovalent substituent represented by the following general formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(4)中、B1は吸着部位を表し、R24は単結合又は(a+1)価の連結基を表す。aは、1~10の整数を表し、一般式(4)中にa個存在するB1は同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。 In General Formula (4), B 1 represents an adsorption site, and R 24 represents a single bond or a (a + 1) -valent linking group. a represents an integer of 1 to 10, and B 1 existing in the general formula (4) may be the same or different.
 Bで表される吸着部位としては、前述の一般式(1)のA1を構成する吸着部位と同様のものが挙げられ、好ましい例も同様である。
 中でも、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、スルホンアミド基、イミド基又は配位性酸素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、pKa5~14の官能基であることがより好ましい観点から、ウレア基、ウレタン基、スルホンアミド基、イミド基又は配位性酸素原子を有する基であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the adsorption site represented by B 1 include the same adsorption sites as those constituting A 1 in the general formula (1), and preferred examples are also the same.
Among them, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom is preferable, and a urea group, a functional group having a pKa of 5 to 14 is more preferable. It is more preferably a urethane group, a sulfonamide group, an imide group or a group having a coordinating oxygen atom.
 R24は、単結合又は(a+1)価の連結基を表し、aは1~10を表す。好ましくは、aは1~7であり、より好ましくは、aは1~5であり、特に好ましくは、aは1~3である。
 (a+1)価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、及び0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
R 24 represents a single bond or a (a + 1) -valent linking group, and a represents 1 to 10. Preferably, a is 1 to 7, more preferably a is 1 to 5, and particularly preferably a is 1 to 3.
(A + 1) valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included and may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
 (a+1)価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位又は該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the (a + 1) -valent linking group include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units (which may form a ring structure).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 R24としては、単結合、又は、1から50個までの炭素原子、0個から8個までの窒素原子、0個から25個までの酸素原子、1個から100個までの水素原子、及び0個から10個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ(a+1)価の連結基が好ましく、単結合、又は、1から30個までの炭素原子、0個から6個までの窒素原子、0個から15個までの酸素原子、1個から50個までの水素原子、及び0個から7個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ(a+1)価の連結基がより好ましく、単結合、又は、1から10個までの炭素原子、0個から5個までの窒素原子、0個から10個までの酸素原子、1個から30個までの水素原子、及び0個から5個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ(a+1)価の連結基が特に好ましい。 R 24 may be a single bond or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 25 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms, and (A + 1) valent linking groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, single bonds or 1 to 30 carbon atoms, 0 to 6 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 15 More preferred are (a + 1) valent linking groups consisting of up to oxygen atoms, 1 to 50 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, a single bond, or 1 to 10 carbons (A + 1) valent linkage consisting of atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms The group is particularly preferred.
 上記のうち、(a+1)価の連結基が置換基を有する場合、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。 Among the above, when the (a + 1) -valent linking group has a substituent, examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, acetoxy groups, etc., carbon atoms such as methoxy groups, ethoxy groups, etc. Alkoxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, t-butyl carbonate, etc. And the like.
 一般式(1)中、R2は単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。n個のR2は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 2価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、及び0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In general formula (1), R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The n R 2 s may be the same or different.
Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
 上記2価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位又は該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される基を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the divalent linking group include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 R2としては、単結合、又は、1から50個までの炭素原子、0個から8個までの窒素原子、0個から25個までの酸素原子、1個から100個までの水素原子、及び0個から10個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ2価の連結基が好ましく、単結合、又は、1から30個までの炭素原子、0個から6個までの窒素原子、0個から15個までの酸素原子、1個から50個までの水素原子、及び0個から7個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ2価の連結基がより好ましく、単結合、又は、1から10個までの炭素原子、0個から5個までの窒素原子、0個から10個までの酸素原子、1個から30個までの水素原子、及び0個から5個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ2価の連結基が特に好ましい。 R 2 may be a single bond or 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 25 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 hydrogen atoms, and Divalent linking groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, single bonds, or 1 to 30 carbon atoms, 0 to 6 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 15 More preferred are divalent linking groups consisting of oxygen atoms, 1 to 50 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, a single bond or 1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 Particularly preferred are divalent linking groups consisting of from 1 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 oxygen atoms, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms.
 上記のうち、2価の連結基が置換基を有する場合、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。 Among the above, when the divalent linking group has a substituent, examples of the substituent include carbon numbers such as an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as aryl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamido group, N-sulfonylamido group, acetoxy group, etc. having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, methoxy group, ethoxy group, etc. To 6 to 6 alkoxy groups, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, carbonic acid such as t-butyl carbonate, etc. An ester group etc. are mentioned.
 一般式(1)中、R1は、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。m+nは3~10を満たす。
 R1で表される(m+n)価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、及び0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
In general formula (1), R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 200. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
 (m+n)価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位又は該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group include the following structural units or groups formed by combining the structural units (which may form a ring structure).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 (m+n)価の連結基としては、1から60個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から40個までの酸素原子、1個から120個までの水素原子、及び0個から10個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が好ましく、1から50個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から30個までの酸素原子、1個から100個までの水素原子、及び0個から7個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基がより好ましく、1から40個までの炭素原子、0個から8個までの窒素原子、0個から20個までの酸素原子、1個から80個までの水素原子、及び0個から5個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が特に好ましい。 (M + n) -valent linking groups include 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 40 oxygen atoms, 1 to 120 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 10 sulfur atoms are preferred, 1 to 50 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 30 oxygen atoms, 1 to 100 And more preferably a group consisting of 0 to 7 sulfur atoms, 1 to 40 carbon atoms, 0 to 8 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 20 oxygen atoms, Particular preference is given to groups consisting of 1 to 80 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms.
 上記のうち、(m+n)価の連結基が置換基を有する場合、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。 Among the above, when the (m + n) -valent linking group has a substituent, examples of the substituent include an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as a methyl group and an ethyl group, a phenyl group, and a naphthyl group. C1-C6 acyloxy groups such as aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, sulfonamido groups, N-sulfonylamido groups, acetoxy groups, etc., carbon atoms such as methoxy groups, ethoxy groups, etc. Alkoxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine, alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonyl group, ethoxycarbonyl group and cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, cyano group, t-butyl carbonate, etc. And the like.
 R1で表される(m+n)価の連結基の具体的な例〔具体例(1)~(17)〕を以下に示す。但し、本発明においては、これらに制限されるものではない。 Specific examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 [specific examples (1) to (17)] are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 上記の具体例の中でも、原料の入手性、合成の容易さ、各種溶媒への溶解性の観点から、最も好ましい(m+n)価の連結基は下記の基である。 Among the above specific examples, the most preferable (m + n) -valent linking group is the following group from the viewpoint of availability of raw materials, ease of synthesis, and solubility in various solvents.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 一般式(1)中、mは8以下の正の数を表す。mとしては、0.5~5が好ましく、1~4がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。
 また、一般式(1)中、nは1~9を表す。nとしては、2~8が好ましく、2~7がより好ましく、3~6が特に好ましい。
In general formula (1), m represents a positive number of 8 or less. m is preferably 0.5 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
In the general formula (1), n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and particularly preferably 3 to 6.
 一般式(1)中、P1はポリマー鎖を表し、公知のポリマーなどから目的等に応じて選択することができる。m個のP1は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 ポリマーの中でも、ポリマー鎖を構成するには、ビニルモノマーの重合体もしくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、アミド系ポリマー、エポキシ系ポリマー、シリコーン系ポリマー、及びこれらの変性物、又は共重合体〔例えば、ポリエーテル/ポリウレタン共重合体、ポリエーテル/ビニルモノマーの重合体の共重合体など(ランダム共重合体、ブロック共重合体、グラフト共重合体のいずれであってもよい。)を含む。〕からなる群より選択される少なくとも一種が好ましく、ビニルモノマーの重合体もしくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー、及びこれらの変性物又は共重合体からなる群より選択される少なくとも一種がより好ましく、ビニルモノマーの重合体もしくは共重合体が特に好ましい。
In the general formula (1), P 1 represents a polymer chain and can be selected from known polymers according to the purpose. The m P 1 may be the same or different.
Among the polymers, a vinyl monomer polymer or copolymer, an ester polymer, an ether polymer, a urethane polymer, an amide polymer, an epoxy polymer, a silicone polymer, and modifications thereof are used to form a polymer chain. Or copolymer [for example, polyether / polyurethane copolymer, copolymer of polyether / vinyl monomer polymer, etc. (any of random copolymer, block copolymer, graft copolymer, etc. May also be included). At least one selected from the group consisting of vinyl monomers, selected from the group consisting of polymers or copolymers of vinyl monomers, ester polymers, ether polymers, urethane polymers, and modified products or copolymers thereof. At least one kind is more preferred, and a polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomers is particularly preferred.
 ポリマー鎖P1は、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含有することが好ましい。
 ポリマー鎖P1における、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位の繰り返し単位数kが、立体反発力を発揮し分散性を向上し、高屈折率かつ低粘度を達成する観点から、3以上であることが好ましく、5以上であることがより好ましい。
 また、高分子分散剤(B)の嵩張りを抑え低粘度を達成し、更に硬化膜(透明膜)中に金属酸化物粒子(A)を密に存在させ、高屈折率を達成する観点から、少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位の繰り返し単位数kは、50以下であることが好ましく、40以下であることがより好ましく、30以下であることが更に好ましい。
The polymer chain P 1 preferably contains at least one repeating unit.
The number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit in the polymer chain P 1 is preferably 3 or more from the viewpoint of achieving steric repulsion and improving dispersibility, achieving a high refractive index and a low viscosity. More preferably, it is 5 or more.
From the viewpoint of suppressing the bulk of the polymer dispersant (B) and achieving a low viscosity, and further allowing the metal oxide particles (A) to be present in the cured film (transparent film) densely to achieve a high refractive index. The number k of repeating units of at least one repeating unit is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 40 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less.
 なお、ポリマー鎖を構成するポリマーは有機溶媒に可溶であることが好ましい。有機溶媒との親和性が低いと、分散媒との親和性が弱まり、分散安定化に十分な吸着層を確保できなくなることがある。
 上記ビニルモノマーとしては、特に制限されないが、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、クロトン酸エステル類、ビニルエステル類、酸基を有するビニルモノマー、マレイン酸ジエステル類、フマル酸ジエステル類、イタコン酸ジエステル類、(メタ)アクリルアミド類、スチレン類、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルケトン類、オレフィン類、マレイミド類、(メタ)アクリロニトリルなどが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、クロトン酸エステル類、ビニルエステル類、酸基を有するビニルモノマーであることがより好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類、クロトン酸エステル類であることが更に好ましい。
 これらのビニルモノマーの好ましい例としては、特開2007-277514号公報(対応US公報:US2010/233595 A1)の段落0089~0094、0096、及び、0097に記載のビニルモノマーが挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
The polymer constituting the polymer chain is preferably soluble in an organic solvent. When the affinity with the organic solvent is low, the affinity with the dispersion medium is weakened, and it may be impossible to secure an adsorption layer sufficient for stabilizing the dispersion.
Although it does not restrict | limit especially as said vinyl monomer, For example, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, vinyl monomers having an acid group, maleic acid diesters, fumaric acid diesters, itaconic acid diesters , (Meth) acrylamides, styrenes, vinyl ethers, vinyl ketones, olefins, maleimides, (meth) acrylonitrile, etc. are preferred, (meth) acrylic acid esters, crotonic acid esters, vinyl esters, acid groups More preferred are vinyl monomers having a (meth) acrylic acid ester and crotonic acid ester.
Preferable examples of these vinyl monomers include the vinyl monomers described in paragraphs 0089 to 0094, 0096, and 0097 of JP-A-2007-277514 (corresponding US publication: US2010 / 233595 A1). Is incorporated herein.
 上記の化合物以外にも、例えば、ウレタン基、ウレア基、スルホンアミド基、フェノール基、イミド基などの官能基を有するビニルモノマーも用いることができる。このようなウレタン基、又はウレア基を有する単量体としては、例えば、イソシアナート基と水酸基、又はアミノ基の付加反応を利用して、適宜合成することが可能である。具体的には、イソシアナート基含有モノマーと水酸基を1個含有する化合物又は1級あるいは2級アミノ基を1個含有する化合物との付加反応、又は水酸基含有モノマー又は1級あるいは2級アミノ基含有モノマーとモノイソシアネートとの付加反応等により適宜合成することができる。 In addition to the above compounds, for example, vinyl monomers having a functional group such as a urethane group, a urea group, a sulfonamide group, a phenol group, and an imide group can also be used. Such a monomer having a urethane group or a urea group can be appropriately synthesized using, for example, an addition reaction between an isocyanate group and a hydroxyl group or an amino group. Specifically, an addition reaction between an isocyanate group-containing monomer and a compound containing one hydroxyl group or a compound containing one primary or secondary amino group, or a hydroxyl group-containing monomer or primary or secondary amino group containing It can be appropriately synthesized by an addition reaction between a monomer and monoisocyanate.
 酸性基を有するビニルモノマーの例としては、カルボキシル基を有するビニルモノマーやスルホン酸基を有するビニルモノマーが挙げられる。
 カルボキシル基を有するビニルモノマーとして、(メタ)アクリル酸、ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸、マレイン酸モノアルキルエステル、フマル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、桂皮酸、アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。また、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどの水酸基を有する単量体と無水マレイン酸や無水フタル酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸無水物のような環状無水物との付加反応物、ω-カルボキシ-ポリカプロラクトンモノ(メタ)アクリレートなども利用できる。また、カルボキシル基の前駆体として無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸などの無水物含有モノマーを用いてもよい。なおこれらの内では、共重合性やコスト、溶解性などの観点から(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましい。
Examples of the vinyl monomer having an acidic group include a vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group and a vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group.
Examples of the vinyl monomer having a carboxyl group include (meth) acrylic acid, vinyl benzoic acid, maleic acid, maleic acid monoalkyl ester, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, cinnamic acid, and acrylic acid dimer. Also, an addition reaction product of a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate and a cyclic anhydride such as maleic anhydride, phthalic anhydride, or cyclohexanedicarboxylic anhydride, ω-carboxy-polycaprolactone Mono (meth) acrylates can also be used. Moreover, you may use anhydride containing monomers, such as maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride, as a precursor of a carboxyl group. Of these, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferred from the viewpoints of copolymerizability, cost, solubility, and the like.
 また、スルホン酸基を有するビニルモノマーとして、2-アクリルアミド-2-メチルプロパンスルホン酸などが挙げられ、リン酸基を有するビニルモノマーとして、リン酸モノ(2-アクリロイルオキシエチルエステル)、リン酸モノ(1-メチル-2-アクリロイルオキシエチルエステル)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the vinyl monomer having a sulfonic acid group include 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid, and examples of the vinyl monomer having a phosphoric acid group include phosphoric acid mono (2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and phosphoric acid mono (1-methyl-2-acryloyloxyethyl ester) and the like.
 更に、酸性基を有するビニルモノマーとして、フェノール性ヒドロキシル基を含有するビニルモノマーやスルホンアミド基を含有するビニルモノマーなども利用することができる。 Furthermore, as the vinyl monomer having an acidic group, a vinyl monomer containing a phenolic hydroxyl group, a vinyl monomer containing a sulfonamide group, or the like can be used.
 一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物の中でも、下記一般式(2)で表される高分子化合物が好ましい。 Among the polymer compounds represented by the general formula (1), the polymer compound represented by the following general formula (2) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 一般式(2)において、A2は、炭化水素基、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、イミド基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、複素環基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基及び水酸基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基を表す。n個のA2は同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 なお、A2は、一般式(1)における上記A1と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
In the general formula (2), A 2 represents a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, or an alkylaminocarbonyl group. Represents a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of imide group, carboxylate group, sulfonamide group, heterocyclic group, alkoxysilyl group, epoxy group, isocyanate group and hydroxyl group. The n A 2 may be the same or different.
Incidentally, A 2 has the same meaning as above A 1 in the general formula (1), a preferable embodiment thereof is also the same.
 一般式(2)において、R4及びR5は、それぞれ独立に、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。n個のR4は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。また、m個のR5は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
 R4、R5で表される2価の連結基としては、一般式(1)のR2で表される2価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
In the general formula (2), R 4 and R 5 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The n R 4 s may be the same or different. The m R 5 s may be the same or different.
As the divalent linking group represented by R 4 or R 5 , the same divalent linking groups as those represented by R 2 in the general formula (1) can be used, and a preferred embodiment is also used. It is the same.
 一般式(2)において、R3は、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。m+nは3~10を満たす。
 R3で表される(m+n)価の連結基としては、1から60個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から100個までの水素原子、及び0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。
 R3で表される(m+n)価の連結基として、具体的には、一般式(1)のR1で表される(m+n)価の連結基として挙げられたものと同様のものが用いられ、好ましい態様も同様である。
In the general formula (2), R 3 represents an (m + n) -valent linking group. m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
Examples of the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 include 1 to 60 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, and 1 to 100 atoms. Groups consisting of up to 20 hydrogen atoms and 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or may further have a substituent.
Specifically, as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 3 , those similar to those exemplified as the (m + n) -valent linking group represented by R 1 in the general formula (1) are used. The preferred embodiments are also the same.
 一般式(2)中、mは8以下の正の数を表す。mとしては、0.5~5が好ましく、1~4がより好ましく、1~3が特に好ましい。
 また、一般式(2)中、nは1~9を表す。nとしては、2~8が好ましく、2~7がより好ましく、3~6が特に好ましい。
In general formula (2), m represents a positive number of 8 or less. m is preferably 0.5 to 5, more preferably 1 to 4, and particularly preferably 1 to 3.
In the general formula (2), n represents 1 to 9. n is preferably 2 to 8, more preferably 2 to 7, and particularly preferably 3 to 6.
 また、一般式(2)中のP2は、ポリマー鎖を表し、公知のポリマーなどから目的等に応じて選択することができる。m個のP2は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。ポリマーの好ましい態様については、一般式(1)におけるP1と同様である。 Further, P 2 of the general formula (2) represents a polymer chain, can be selected according to the purpose or the like from such known polymers. The m P 2 may be the same or different. The preferred embodiment of the polymer is the same as P 1 in the general formula (1).
 一般式(2)で表される高分子化合物のうち、以下に示すR3、R4、R5、P2、m、及びnを全て満たすものが最も好ましい。
 R3:上記具体例(1)、(2)、(10)、(11)、(16)、又は(17)
 R4:単結合、又は、下記の構造単位若しくは該構造単位が組み合わさって構成される「1から10個までの炭素原子、0個から5個までの窒素原子、0個から10個までの酸素原子、1個から30個までの水素原子、及び0個から5個までの硫黄原子」から成り立つ2価の連結基(置換基を有していてもよく、該置換基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基等の炭素数1から20までのアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等の炭素数6から16までのアリール基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、N-スルホニルアミド基、アセトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアシルオキシ基、メトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1から6までのアルコキシ基、塩素、臭素等のハロゲン原子、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基等の炭素数2から7までのアルコキシカルボニル基、シアノ基、t-ブチルカーボネート等の炭酸エステル基等が挙げられる。)
Of the polymer compounds represented by the general formula (2), those satisfying all of R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , P 2 , m, and n shown below are most preferable.
R 3 : Specific example (1), (2), (10), (11), (16), or (17) above
R 4 : A single bond or the following structural unit or a combination of the structural units: “1 to 10 carbon atoms, 0 to 5 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 10 carbon atoms” A divalent linking group comprising an oxygen atom, 1 to 30 hydrogen atoms, and 0 to 5 sulfur atoms (which may have a substituent, for example, Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms such as methyl group and ethyl group, aryl groups having 6 to 16 carbon atoms such as phenyl group and naphthyl group, hydroxyl group, amino group, carboxyl group, sulfonamide group, N-sulfonylamide Groups, acyloxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as acetoxy groups, alkoxy groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms such as methoxy groups and ethoxy groups, halogen atoms such as chlorine and bromine, methoxycarbonyl groups, ethoxy groups Carbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group having from 2 to 7 carbon atoms such as cyclohexyl oxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, such as carbonic acid ester group such as t- butyl carbonate.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 R5:単結合、エチレン基、プロピレン基、下記基(a)、又は下記基(b)
 なお、下記基中、R12は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、lは1又は2を表す。
R 5 : single bond, ethylene group, propylene group, the following group (a), or the following group (b)
In the following groups, R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and l represents 1 or 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 P2:ビニルモノマーの重合体もしくは共重合体、エステル系ポリマー、エーテル系ポリマー、ウレタン系ポリマー及びこれらの変性物
 m:1~3
 n:3~6
P 2 : Polymer or copolymer of vinyl monomer, ester polymer, ether polymer, urethane polymer and modified products thereof m: 1 to 3
n: 3-6
 高分子分散剤(B)の酸価は特に制限はないが、粘度ないし分散性の観点から、酸価が400mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、300mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、250mgKOH/g以下であることが特に好ましい。
 なお、酸価の下限値としては特に制限はないが、金属酸化物粒子の分散安定性の観点から、5mgKOH/g以上であることが好ましく、10mgKOH/g以上であることがより好ましい。
The acid value of the polymer dispersant (B) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of viscosity or dispersibility, the acid value is preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, and 250 mgKOH. / G or less is particularly preferable.
In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as a lower limit of an acid value, From a viewpoint of the dispersion stability of a metal oxide particle, it is preferable that it is 5 mgKOH / g or more, and it is more preferable that it is 10 mgKOH / g or more.
 ここで、高分子分散剤の酸価は、高分子化合物の固形分酸価である。
 本発明において、高分子分散剤の酸価は、例えば、高分子分散剤中における酸性基の平均含有量から算出することができる。高分子分散剤の酸価は高分子分散剤中の酸基の量と、後述のpKa5~14の官能基の量とを適宜調整することにより、調整できる。例えば、高分子分散剤の合成に際し、原料となる酸性基及び炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物の仕込み量、pKa5~14の官能基及び炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物の仕込み量、酸性基を有するビニルモノマーの仕込み量を適宜調整することで所望の酸価を有する高分子分散剤を合成することができる。
Here, the acid value of the polymer dispersant is the solid content acid value of the polymer compound.
In the present invention, the acid value of the polymer dispersant can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acidic groups in the polymer dispersant. The acid value of the polymer dispersant can be adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of acid groups in the polymer dispersant and the amount of functional groups of pKa5 to 14 described later. For example, when synthesizing a polymer dispersant, the amount of a compound having an acidic group and a carbon-carbon double bond as a raw material, the amount of a compound having a functional group of pKa5 to 14 and a carbon-carbon double bond, an acidity A polymer dispersant having a desired acid value can be synthesized by appropriately adjusting the amount of the vinyl monomer having a group.
(一般式(1)又は(2)で表される高分子化合物の合成方法)
 一般式(1)又は(2)で表される高分子化合物は、特に制限されないが、特開2007-277514号公報の段落0114~0140及び0266~0348に記載の合成方法に準じて合成することができる。
 特に、複数の吸着部位を有するメルカプタン化合物存在下で、ビニルモノマーをラジカル重合する方法により一般式(1)又は(2)で表される高分子化合物を合成することが好ましい。
(Method for synthesizing polymer compound represented by formula (1) or (2))
The polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) or (2) is not particularly limited, but may be synthesized according to the synthesis method described in paragraphs 0114 to 0140 and 0266 to 0348 of JP-A-2007-277514. Can do.
In particular, it is preferable to synthesize a polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) or (2) by radical polymerization of a vinyl monomer in the presence of a mercaptan compound having a plurality of adsorption sites.
 上記のビニルモノマーは1種のみで重合させてもよいし、2種以上を併用して共重合させてもよい。
 ここで、ビニルモノマーの具体例(M-1)~(M-13)を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
The above vinyl monomers may be polymerized by only one kind, or may be copolymerized by using two or more kinds in combination.
Specific examples (M-1) to (M-13) of vinyl monomers are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 一般式(1)又は(2)で表される高分子化合物の合成方法として、より具体的には、下記一般式(3)で表される化合物存在下で、ビニルモノマーをラジカル重合させる方法が好ましい。 More specifically, as a method for synthesizing the polymer compound represented by the general formula (1) or (2), there is a method in which a vinyl monomer is radically polymerized in the presence of a compound represented by the following general formula (3). preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 一般式(3)において、R6、R7、A3、m、及びnは、それぞれ一般式(2)におけるR3、R4、A2、m、及びnと同義であり、その好ましい態様も同様である。 In the general formula (3), R 6 , R 7 , A 3 , m, and n have the same meanings as R 3 , R 4 , A 2 , m, and n in the general formula (2), respectively. Is the same.
 一般式(3)で表される化合物は下記の方法で合成することが好ましい。
 一分子中に3~10個のメルカプト基を有する化合物と、吸着部位を有し、かつメルカプト基と反応可能な炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物とを付加反応させる方法。
The compound represented by the general formula (3) is preferably synthesized by the following method.
A method in which a compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule is added to a compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond capable of reacting with a mercapto group.
 付加反応がラジカル付加反応であることが特に好ましい。なお、炭素-炭素二重結合としては、メルカプト基との反応性の点で、1置換もしくは2置換のビニル基がより好ましい。 It is particularly preferable that the addition reaction is a radical addition reaction. The carbon-carbon double bond is more preferably a mono- or di-substituted vinyl group from the viewpoint of reactivity with a mercapto group.
 一分子中に3~10個のメルカプト基を有する化合物の具体的な例〔具体例(18)~(34)〕としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule [specific examples (18) to (34)] include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 上記の中でも、原料の入手性、合成の容易さ、各種溶媒への溶解性の観点から、特に好ましい化合物は、以下の化合物である。 Of the above, the following compounds are particularly preferred from the viewpoint of availability of raw materials, ease of synthesis, and solubility in various solvents.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 上記は、市販品として、(例えば(33)はジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート):堺化学工業(株)製)などが入手可能である。 The above is commercially available (for example, (33) is dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate): manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 吸着部位を有し、かつ、炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物(具体的には、炭化水素基、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、複素環基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基及び水酸基よりなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有し、かつ、炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物)としては、特に制限されないが、以下のようなものが挙げられる。 A compound having an adsorption site and a carbon-carbon double bond (specifically, a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, a urea group, a urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a basic nitrogen atom) Having at least one group selected from the group consisting of a group having an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxysilyl group, an epoxy group, an isocyanate group, and a hydroxyl group In addition, the compound having a carbon-carbon double bond is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include the following.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 「一分子中に3~10個のメルカプト基を有する化合物」と、「吸着部位を有し、かつ、炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物」とのラジカル付加反応生成物は、例えば、上記の「一分子中に3~10個のメルカプト基を有する化合物」及び「吸着部位を有し、かつ、炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物」を適当な溶媒中に溶解し、ここにラジカル発生剤を添加して、約50℃~100℃で、付加させる方法(チオール-エン反応法)を利用して得られる。 The radical addition reaction product of “a compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule” and “a compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond” is, for example, “A compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule” and “a compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond” are dissolved in a suitable solvent, and a radical generator is prepared here. And adding at about 50 ° C. to 100 ° C. (thiol-ene reaction method).
 チオール-エン反応法で用いられる適当な溶媒の例としては、用いる「一分子中に3~10個のメルカプト基を有する化合物」、「吸着部位を有し、かつ、炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物」、及び「生成するラジカル付加反応生成物」の溶解性に応じて任意に選択できる。
 例えば、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-エチルヘキサノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、メトキシプロピルアセテート、乳酸エチル、酢酸エチル、アセトニトリル、テトラヒドロフラン、ジメチルホルムアミド、クロロホルム、トルエンが挙げられる。これらの溶媒は、二種以上を混合して使用してもよい。
Examples of suitable solvents used in the thiol-ene reaction method include “a compound having 3 to 10 mercapto groups in one molecule”, “having an adsorption site, and a carbon-carbon double bond. It can be arbitrarily selected according to the solubility of the “compound having” and the “radical addition reaction product to be produced”.
For example, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethylhexanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methoxypropyl acetate, ethyl lactate, ethyl acetate, Examples include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, and toluene. These solvents may be used as a mixture of two or more.
 また、ラジカル発生剤としては、2,2’-アゾビス(イソブチロニトリル)(AIBN)、2,2’-アゾビス-(2,4’-ジメチルバレロニトリル)、2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕のようなアゾ化合物、ベンゾイルパーオキシドのような過酸化物、及び過硫酸カリウム、過硫酸アンモニウムのような過硫酸塩などが利用できる。 Further, as radical generators, 2,2′-azobis (isobutyronitrile) (AIBN), 2,2′-azobis- (2,4′-dimethylvaleronitrile), dimethyl 2,2′-azobisisobutyrate An azo compound such as [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.], a peroxide such as benzoyl peroxide, and a persulfate such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate can be used.
 高分子化合物としては、これらのビニルモノマーと一般式(3)で表される化合物とを用いて、公知の方法で常法に従って重合させることで得られるものが好ましい。なお、本発明における一般式(3)で表される化合物は、連鎖移動剤として機能するものであり、以下、単に「連鎖移動剤」と称することがある。
 例えば、これらのビニルモノマー、及び連鎖移動剤を適当な溶媒中に溶解し、ここにラジカル重合開始剤を添加して、約50℃~220℃で、溶液中で重合させる方法(溶液重合法)を利用して得られる。
As the polymer compound, those obtained by polymerizing these vinyl monomers and the compound represented by the general formula (3) by a known method according to a conventional method are preferable. In addition, the compound represented by General formula (3) in this invention functions as a chain transfer agent, and may only be called a "chain transfer agent" hereafter.
For example, a method in which these vinyl monomers and a chain transfer agent are dissolved in a suitable solvent, a radical polymerization initiator is added thereto and polymerized in a solution at about 50 ° C. to 220 ° C. (solution polymerization method) Can be obtained using
 溶液重合法で用いられる適当な溶媒の例としては、用いる単量体、及び生成する共重合体の溶解性に応じて任意に選択できる。例えば、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、2-エチルヘキサノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、メトキシプロピルアセテート、乳酸エチル、酢酸エチル、アセトニトリル、テトラヒドロフラン、ジメチルホルムアミド、クロロホルム、トルエンが挙げられる。これらの溶媒は、二種以上を混合して使用してもよい。 Examples of suitable solvents used in the solution polymerization method can be arbitrarily selected according to the monomers used and the solubility of the resulting copolymer. For example, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 2-ethylhexanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methoxypropyl acetate, ethyl lactate, ethyl acetate, Examples include acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, and toluene. These solvents may be used as a mixture of two or more.
 また、ラジカル重合開始剤としては、2,2’-アゾビス(イソブチロニトリル)(AIBN)、2,2’-アゾビス-(2,4’-ジメチルバレロニトリル)、2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕のようなアゾ化合物、ベンゾイルパーオキシドのような過酸化物、及び過硫酸カリウム、過硫酸アンモニウムのような過硫酸塩などが利用できる。 Examples of radical polymerization initiators include 2,2′-azobis (isobutyronitrile) (AIBN), 2,2′-azobis- (2,4′-dimethylvaleronitrile), and 2,2′-azobisisobutyric acid. An azo compound such as dimethyl [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.], a peroxide such as benzoyl peroxide, and a persulfate such as potassium persulfate and ammonium persulfate can be used.
 硬化膜中における高分子分散剤の含有量は特に制限されないが、分散性、高屈折率及び塗布面状の観点から、硬化膜全質量に対する、5~40質量%の範囲が好ましく、10~35質量%の範囲がより好ましく、12~30質量%の範囲が更に好ましい。
 なお、硬化膜形成用組成物中における高分子分散剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、上記範囲であることが好ましい。
The content of the polymer dispersant in the cured film is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 to 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the cured film from the viewpoints of dispersibility, high refractive index, and coated surface shape. The range of mass% is more preferable, and the range of 12 to 30 mass% is still more preferable.
In addition, it is preferable that content of the polymer dispersing agent in the composition for cured film formation is the said range with respect to the total solid of a composition.
((C)重合性化合物)
 硬化膜の耐溶剤性の観点から、硬化膜形成用組成物には、重合性化合物が含まれることが好ましい。なかでも、重合性化合物として、「分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物」を使用することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物としての分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。
((C) polymerizable compound)
From the viewpoint of the solvent resistance of the cured film, the composition for forming a cured film preferably contains a polymerizable compound. Among these, it is preferable to use “a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule” as the polymerizable compound.
Specific examples of the compound having two or more epoxy groups in the molecule as the polymerizable compound include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy Examples thereof include resins.
 これらは市販品として入手できる。例えば、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER-827、JER-828、JER-834、JER-1001、JER-1002、JER-1003、JER-1055、JER-1007、JER-1009、JER-1010(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等であり、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER-806、JER-807、JER-4004、JER-4005、JER-4007、JER-4010(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等であり、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER-152、JER-154、JER-157S70、JER-157S65、(以上、三菱化学(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等であり、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等であり、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂としては、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE-3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、同PB 4700(以上、ダイセル化学工業(株)製)、デナコール EX-211L、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)等である。その他にも、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、JER-1031S(三菱化学(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
These are available as commercial products. For example, bisphenol A type epoxy resins include JER-827, JER-828, JER-834, JER-1001, JER-1002, JER-1003, JER-1055, JER-1007, JER-1009, JER-1010 ( (Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 860, EPICLON 1050, EPICLON 1051, EPICLON 1055 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), and the like. JER-4005, JER-4007, JER-4010 (Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON 830, EPICLON 835 (Made by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE-602S (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) ) Made) Examples of phenol novolac type epoxy resins include JER-152, JER-154, JER-157S70, JER-157S65 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N -770, EPICLON N-775 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc., and cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N -680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation), EOCN-1020 (above, made by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and ADEKA RESIN EP as an aliphatic epoxy resin -408 S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE-3150, EPOLEEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above, Daicel Chemical Industries ( Denacor EX-211L, EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation) and the like. In addition, ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), JER-1031S (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), and the like.
These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 分子内に2個以上のオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。
As specific examples of the compound having two or more oxetanyl groups in the molecule, Aron oxetane OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be used.
Moreover, it is preferable to use the compound containing an oxetanyl group individually or in mixture with the compound containing an epoxy group.
 また、重合性化合物として、少なくとも1個のエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する付加重合性化合物を使用することもでき、末端エチレン性不飽和結合を少なくとも1個、好ましくは2個以上有する化合物を使用することが好ましい。このような化合物は当該技術分野において広く知られるものであり、本発明においてはこれらを特に限定無く用いることができる。
 このような化合物を重合性化合物として使用する場合、硬化膜形成用組成物は、後述の重合開始剤を更に含有することが好ましい。
 このような少なくとも1個のエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する付加重合性化合物は、例えばモノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち2量体、3量体及びオリゴマー、又はそれらの混合物並びにそれらの共重合体などの化学的形態をもつ。モノマー及びその共重合体の例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸など)や、そのエステル類、アミド類が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類が用いられる。また、ヒドロキシル基やアミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル類あるいは不飽和カルボン酸アミド類と単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類あるいはエポキシ類との付加反応物、及び、単官能若しくは、多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基や、エポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステルあるいは不飽和カルボン酸アミド類と単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との付加反応物;更にハロゲン基や、トシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を有する不飽和カルボン酸エステルあるいは不飽和カルボン酸アミド類と単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との置換反応物も好適である。また、別の例として、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン、ビニルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~段落番号0108に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
Further, as the polymerizable compound, an addition polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond can also be used, and a compound having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated bond, preferably two or more. It is preferable to use it. Such compounds are widely known in the technical field, and can be used without particular limitation in the present invention.
When such a compound is used as the polymerizable compound, the composition for forming a cured film preferably further contains a polymerization initiator described later.
Such an addition polymerizable compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated double bond is, for example, a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a copolymer thereof. It has the chemical form of Examples of monomers and copolymers thereof include unsaturated carboxylic acids (for example, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), and esters and amides thereof. In this case, an ester of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compound, or an amide of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and an aliphatic polyvalent amine compound is used. Further, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or unsaturated carboxylic acid amide having a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxyl group, an amino group or a mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy, and A dehydration condensation reaction product with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. In addition, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or unsaturated carboxylic acid amide having an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine, or thiol; Furthermore, a substitution reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or unsaturated carboxylic acid amide having a leaving group such as a halogen group or a tosyloxy group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. It is. As another example, it is also possible to use a group of compounds substituted with unsaturated phosphonic acid, styrene, vinyl ether or the like instead of the unsaturated carboxylic acid. As these specific compounds, the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705 can be preferably used in the present invention.
 また、重合性化合物(以下、単に「重合性モノマー等」、「重合性モノマー」ともいう。)としては、少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン基を有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物も好ましい。その例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、等の単官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート;ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、グリセリンやトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、特公昭48-41708号、特公昭50-6034号、特開昭51-37193号各公報に記載されているようなウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、特開昭48-64183号、特公昭49-43191号、特公昭52-30490号各公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシポリマーと(メタ)アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート及びこれらの混合物を挙げることができる。
 多官能カルボン酸にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等の環状エーテル基とエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物を反応させ得られる多官能(メタ)アクリレートなども挙げることができる。
 また、その他の好ましい重合性モノマー等として、特開2010-160418、特開2010-129825、特許4364216等に記載される、フルオレン環を有し、エチレン性重合性基を2官能以上有する化合物、カルドポリマーも使用することが可能である。
In addition, the polymerizable compound (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “polymerizable monomer”, “polymerizable monomer”) has at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and has a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure. A compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group is also preferred. Examples include monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethanetri (Meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (Meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) iso (Meth) acrylate obtained by adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to polyfunctional alcohols such as anurate, glycerin and trimethylolethane, JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034, JP-A-51- Urethane (meth) acrylates as described in JP-B-37193, polyester acrylates described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191, JP-B-52-30490, Mention may be made of polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates which are reaction products of epoxy polymers and (meth) acrylic acid, and mixtures thereof.
A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by reacting a polyfunctional carboxylic acid with a compound having a cyclic ether group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and an ethylenically unsaturated group can also be used.
Further, as other preferable polymerizable monomers and the like, compounds having a fluorene ring and having two or more functional ethylenic groups described in JP 2010-160418 A, JP 2010-129825 A, JP 4364216 A, etc. Polymers can also be used.
 また、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を有し、少なくとも一つの付加重合可能なエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物としては、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号[0254]~[0257]に記載の化合物も好適である。 Further, compounds having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure and having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated group are disclosed in paragraphs [0254] to [0257] of JP-A-2008-292970. The compounds described are also suitable.
 また、特開平10-62986号公報において一般式(1)及び(2)としてその具体例と共に記載の、多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後に(メタ)アクリレート化した化合物も、重合性モノマーとして用いることができる。
 本発明で用いる重合性モノマーは、さらに、下記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-6)で表される重合性モノマーであることが好ましい。
Further, compounds described in JP-A-10-62986 as general formulas (1) and (2) together with specific examples thereof, which are (meth) acrylated after adding ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to a polyfunctional alcohol, It can be used as a polymerizable monomer.
The polymerizable monomer used in the present invention is preferably a polymerizable monomer represented by the following general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-6).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(式中、nは、それぞれ、0~14であり、mは、それぞれ、1~8である。一分子内に複数存在するR、T及びZは、それぞれ、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。Tがオキシアルキレン基の場合には、炭素原子側の末端がRに結合する。Rのうち少なくとも1つは、重合性基である。) (In the formula, n is each 0 to 14, and m is 1 to 8, respectively. A plurality of R, T, and Z present in one molecule may be the same or different. When T is an oxyalkylene group, the terminal on the carbon atom side is bonded to R. At least one of R is a polymerizable group.)
 nは0~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 mは1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Rは、
n is preferably 0 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
m is preferably 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.
R is
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
で表される基であることが好ましく、 Is preferably a group represented by
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
で表される基であることがより好ましい。
 上記一般式(MO-1)~(MO-6)で表される、ラジカル重合性モノマーの具体例としては、特開2007-269779号公報の段落[0248]~段落[0251]に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
It is more preferable that it is group represented by these.
Specific examples of the radical polymerizable monomer represented by the above general formulas (MO-1) to (MO-6) are described in paragraphs [0248] to [0251] of JP-A No. 2007-26979. The compound can be suitably used in the present invention.
 中でも、重合性モノマー等としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬株式会社製)、及びこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造や、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては M-460;東亜合成製)が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。
 例えば、RP-1040(日本化薬株式会社製)などが挙げられる。
Among them, as a polymerizable monomer, dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercially available product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercially available product, KAYARAD D-320; Nippon Kayaku) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (manufactured by Co., Ltd.) (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Company), and the structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (commercially available product is M-460; manufactured by Toa Gosei) ) Preferred. These oligomer types can also be used.
Examples thereof include RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性モノマー等としては、多官能モノマーであって、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。従って、エチレン性化合物が、上記のように混合物である場合のように未反応のカルボキシル基を有するものであれば、これをそのまま利用することができるが、必要において、上述のエチレン性化合物のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸性基を導入してもよい。この場合、使用される非芳香族カルボン酸無水物の具体例としては、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、アルキル化無水ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸が挙げられる。 The polymerizable monomer is a polyfunctional monomer and may have an acid group such as a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, or a phosphoric acid group. Therefore, if the ethylenic compound has an unreacted carboxyl group as in the case of a mixture as described above, this can be used as it is. The group may be introduced with an acidic group by reacting with a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride. In this case, specific examples of the non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride used include tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, hexahydrophthalic anhydride, alkylated hexahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, anhydrous Maleic acid is mentioned.
 本発明において、酸性基を有するモノマーとしては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルであり、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシル基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸性基を持たせた多官能モノマーが好ましく、特に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール及び/又はジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成株式会社製の多塩基酸変性アクリルオリゴマーとして、アロニックスシリーズのM-305、M-510、M-520などが挙げられる。
 酸性基を有する多官能モノマーの好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mg-KOH/gであり、特に好ましくは5~30mg-KOH/gである。異なる酸性基の多官能モノマーを2種以上併用する場合、或いは酸性基を有しない多官能モノマーを併用する場合、全体の多官能モノマーとしての酸価が上記範囲に入るように調製することが必須である。
In the present invention, the monomer having an acidic group is an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxyl group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polyfunctional monomer having an acidic group is preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix series M-305, M-510, and M-520 as polybasic acid-modified acrylic oligomers manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
A preferable acid value of the polyfunctional monomer having an acidic group is 0.1 to 40 mg-KOH / g, and particularly preferably 5 to 30 mg-KOH / g. When two or more types of polyfunctional monomers having different acidic groups are used in combination, or when a polyfunctional monomer having no acidic group is used in combination, it is essential that the acid value as the entire polyfunctional monomer is within the above range. It is.
 また、重合性モノマー等として、カプロラクトン変性構造を有する多官能性単量体を含有することが好ましい。
 カプロラクトン変性構造を有する多官能性単量体としては、その分子内にカプロラクトン変性構造を有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸及びε-カプロラクトンをエステル化することにより得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができる。なかでも下記式(11)で表されるカプロラクトン変性構造を有する多官能性単量体が好ましい。
Moreover, it is preferable to contain the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone modified structure as a polymerizable monomer.
The polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone-modified structure is not particularly limited as long as it has a caprolactone-modified structure in the molecule. For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane , Obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohol such as pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone, Mention may be made of functional (meth) acrylates. Among these, a polyfunctional monomer having a caprolactone-modified structure represented by the following formula (11) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(式中、6個のRは全てが下記式(12)で表される基であるか、又は6個のRのうち1~5個が下記式(12)で表される基であり、残余が下記式(13)で表される基である。) (In the formula, all 6 Rs are groups represented by the following formula (12), or 1 to 5 of 6 Rs are groups represented by the following formula (12), The remainder is a group represented by the following formula (13).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
(式中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、mは1又は2の数を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。) (In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents a number of 1 or 2, and “*” represents a bond.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
(式中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。)
 このようなカプロラクトン変性構造を有する多官能性単量体は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(11)~(13)においてm=1、式(12)で表される基の数=2、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(2)で表される基の数=3、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(12)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(12)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)等を挙げることができる。
 本発明において、カプロラクトン変性構造を有する多官能性単量体は、単独で又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。
(In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and “*” represents a bond.)
Polyfunctional monomers having such a caprolactone-modified structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = in the above formulas (11) to (13)) 1, number of groups represented by formula (12) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms, DPCA-30 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (2) = 3, compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (same formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (12) = 6, compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA -120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the formula, the number of groups represented by formula (12) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms).
In this invention, the polyfunctional monomer which has a caprolactone modified structure can be used individually or in mixture of 2 or more types.
 また、本発明における重合性モノマー等としては、下記一般式(i)又は(ii)で表される化合物の群から選択される少なくとも1種であることも好ましい。 In addition, the polymerizable monomer or the like in the present invention is preferably at least one selected from the group of compounds represented by the following general formula (i) or (ii).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 一般式(i)及び(ii)中、Eは、各々独立に、-((CH2yCH2O)-、又は-((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-を表し、yは、各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、各々独立に、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、水素原子、又はカルボキシル基を表す。
 一般式(i)中、アクリロイル基及びメタクリロイル基の合計は3個又は4個であり、mは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。但し、各mの合計が0の場合、Xのうちいずれか1つはカルボキシル基である。
 一般式(ii)中、アクリロイル基及びメタクリロイル基の合計は5個又は6個であり、nは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。但し、各nの合計が0の場合、Xのうちいずれか1つはカルボキシル基である。
In general formulas (i) and (ii), each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — Each y independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxyl group.
In the general formula (i), the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40. However, when the total of each m is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
In general formula (ii), the total number of acryloyl groups and methacryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60. However, when the total of each n is 0, any one of X is a carboxyl group.
 一般式(i)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が特に好ましい。
 一般式(ii)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が特に好ましい。
 また、一般式(i)又は一般式(ii)中の-((CH2yCH2O)-又は-((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In general formula (i), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In general formula (ii), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4. The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and particularly preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
Further, — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or — ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — in the general formula (i) or the general formula (ii) is a terminal on the oxygen atom side. Is preferred in which X is bonded to X.
 一般式(i)又は(ii)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、一般式(ii)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態が好ましい。 The compounds represented by the general formula (i) or (ii) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the general formula (ii), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups is preferable.
 一般式(i)又は(ii)で表される化合物は、従来公知の工程である、ペンタエリスリト-ル又はジペンタエリスリト-ルにエチレンオキシド又はプロピレンオキシドを開環付加反応により開環骨格を結合する工程と、開環骨格の末端水酸基に、例えば(メタ)アクリロイルクロライドを反応させて(メタ)アクリロイル基を導入する工程と、から合成することができる。各工程は良く知られた工程であり、当業者は容易に一般式(i)又は(ii)で表される化合物を合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii) has a ring-opening skeleton by a ring-opening addition reaction of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide with pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol, which is a conventionally known process. It can be synthesized from the step of bonding and the step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with the terminal hydroxyl group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (i) or (ii).
 一般式(i)又は(ii)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体及び/又はジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
 具体的には、下記式(a)~(f)で表される化合物(以下、「例示化合物(a)~(f)」ともいう。)が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物(a)、(b)、(e)、(f)が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the general formula (i) or (ii), a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative is more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 一般式(i)、(ii)で表される重合性モノマー等の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬株式会社製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330などが挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available monomers such as polymerizable monomers represented by the general formulas (i) and (ii) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate having six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy chains.
 また、重合性モノマー等としては、特公昭48-41708号、特開昭51-37193号、特公平2-32293号、特公平2-16765号に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号、特公昭56-17654号、特公昭62-39417号、特公昭62-39418号記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。更に、重合性モノマー等として、特開昭63-277653号、特開昭63-260909号、特開平1-105238号に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する付加重合性モノマー類を用いることによって、非常に感光スピードに優れた硬化膜形成用組成物を得ることができる。
 重合性モノマー等の市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200」(新中村化学社製、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(共栄社製)などが挙げられる。
 重合性モノマー等としては、同一分子内に2個以上のメルカプト(SH)基を有する多官能チオール化合物も好適である。特に、下記一般式(I)で表すものが好ましい。
Examples of the polymerizable monomer include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, and the like. Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Furthermore, as polymerizable monomers, addition polymerizable monomers having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. By using, a composition for forming a cured film having an excellent photosensitive speed can be obtained.
Commercially available products such as polymerizable monomers include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 "(manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA -306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha) and the like.
A polyfunctional thiol compound having two or more mercapto (SH) groups in the same molecule is also suitable as the polymerizable monomer. Particularly preferred are those represented by the following general formula (I).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(式中、R1はアルキル基、R2は炭素以外の原子を含んでもよいn価の脂肪族基、R0はHではないアルキル基、nは2~4を表す。) (Wherein R 1 is an alkyl group, R 2 is an n-valent aliphatic group that may contain atoms other than carbon, R 0 is an alkyl group that is not H, and n represents 2 to 4)
 上記一般式(I)で表される多官能チオール化合物を具体的に例示するならば、下記の構造式を有する1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン〔式(II)〕、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジアン-2,4,6(1H,3H5H)-トリオン〔式(III)〕、及びペンタエリスリトール テトラキス(3-メルカプトブチレート)〔式(IV)〕等が挙げられる。これらの多官能チオールは1種又は複数組み合わせて使用することが可能である。 If the polyfunctional thiol compound represented by the general formula (I) is specifically exemplified, 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane [formula (II)] having the following structural formula: 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triasian-2,4,6 (1H, 3H5H) -trione [formula (III)], and pentaerythritol tetrakis (3 -Mercaptobutyrate) [formula (IV)] and the like. These polyfunctional thiols can be used alone or in combination.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 その他のエステルの例として、例えば、特公昭51-47334号公報、特開昭57-196231号公報記載の脂肪族アルコール系エステル類や、特開昭59-5240号公報、特開昭59-5241号公報、特開平2-226149号公報記載の芳香族系骨格を有するもの、特開平1-165613号公報記載のアミノ基を含有するもの等も好適に用いられる。更に、前述のエステルモノマーは混合物としても使用することができる。 Examples of other esters include, for example, aliphatic alcohol esters described in JP-B-51-47334 and JP-A-57-196231, JP-A-59-5240, and JP-A-59-5241. And those having an aromatic skeleton described in JP-A-2-226149 and those containing an amino group described in JP-A-1-165613 are preferably used. Furthermore, the ester monomers described above can also be used as a mixture.
 また、脂肪族多価アミン化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのアミド系モノマーの具体例としては、メチレンビス-アクリルアミド、メチレンビス-メタクリルアミド、1,6-ヘキサメチレンビス-アクリルアミド、1,6-ヘキサメチレンビス-メタクリルアミド、ジエチレントリアミントリスアクリルアミド、キシリレンビスアクリルアミド、キシリレンビスメタクリルアミド等がある。
 その他の好ましいアミド系モノマーの例としては、特公昭54-21726号公報記載のシクロへキシレン構造を有すものを挙げることができる。
Specific examples of amide monomers of aliphatic polyvalent amine compounds and unsaturated carboxylic acids include methylene bis-acrylamide, methylene bis-methacrylamide, 1,6-hexamethylene bis-acrylamide, and 1,6-hexamethylene bis. -Methacrylamide, diethylenetriamine trisacrylamide, xylylene bisacrylamide, xylylene bismethacrylamide and the like.
Examples of other preferable amide monomers include those having a cyclohexylene structure described in JP-B No. 54-21726.
 また、イソシアネートと水酸基の付加反応を用いて製造されるウレタン系付加重合性化合物も好適であり、そのような具体例としては、例えば、特公昭48-41708号公報中に記載されている1分子に2個以上のイソシアネート基を有するポリイソシアネート化合物に、下記式(V)で表され、水酸基を有するビニルモノマーを付加させた1分子中に2個以上の重合性ビニル基を含有するビニルウレタン化合物等が挙げられる。
 下記式(V)中、R7及びR8はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子又はメチル基を示す。
In addition, urethane-based addition polymerizable compounds produced by using an addition reaction of isocyanate and hydroxyl group are also suitable. Specific examples thereof include, for example, one molecule described in JP-B-48-41708. A vinylurethane compound containing two or more polymerizable vinyl groups in one molecule obtained by adding a vinyl monomer having a hydroxyl group represented by the following formula (V) to a polyisocyanate compound having two or more isocyanate groups: Etc.
In the following formula (V), R 7 and R 8 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 また、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されているようなウレタンアクリレート類や、特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、特公昭62-39418号公報記載のエチレンオキサイド系骨格を有するウレタン化合物類も好適である。更に、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、特開平1-105238号公報に記載される、分子内にアミノ構造やスルフィド構造を有する重合性化合物類を用いることによっては、非常に感光スピードに優れた硬化膜形成用組成物を得ることができる。 Further, urethane acrylates as described in JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56- Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in Japanese Patent No. 17654, Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39417, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 62-39418 are also suitable. Further, by using polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238. Can provide a composition for forming a cured film having an excellent photosensitive speed.
 その他の例としては、特開昭48-64183号、特公昭49-43191号、特公昭52-30490号、各公報に記載されているようなポリエステルアクリレート類、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸を反応させて得られたエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタクリレートを挙げることができる。また、特公昭46-43946号公報、特公平1-40337号公報、特公平1-40336号公報記載の特定の不飽和化合物や、特開平2-25493号公報記載のビニルホスホン酸系化合物等も挙げることができる。また、ある場合には、特開昭61-22048号公報記載のペルフルオロアルキル基を含有する構造が好適に使用される。更に、日本接着協会誌vol.20、No.7、300~308ページ(1984年)に記載されている光硬化性モノマー及びオリゴマーも使用することができる。 Other examples include polyester acrylates, epoxy resins and (meth) acrylic acid described in JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191, JP-B-52-30490, and JP-B-52-30490. Mention may be made of polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates obtained by reaction. Further, specific unsaturated compounds described in JP-B-46-43946, JP-B-1-40337, JP-B-1-40336, and vinylphosphonic acid compounds described in JP-A-2-25493 are also included. Can be mentioned. In some cases, a structure containing a perfluoroalkyl group described in JP-A-61-22048 is preferably used. Furthermore, the Japan Adhesion Association magazine vol. 20, no. 7, photocurable monomers and oligomers described on pages 300 to 308 (1984) can also be used.
 これらの重合性化合物について、その構造、単独使用か併用か、添加量等の使用方法の詳細は、硬化膜形成用組成物の最終的な性能設計にあわせて任意に設定できる。例えば、次のような観点から選択される。
 感度の点では1分子あたりの不飽和基含量が多い構造が好ましく、多くの場合、2官能以上が好ましい。また、硬化膜の強度を高くするためには、3官能以上のものがよく、更に、異なる官能数・異なる重合性基(例えばアクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル、スチレン系化合物、ビニルエーテル系化合物)のものを併用することで、感度と強度の両方を調節する方法も有効である。
 また、硬化膜形成用組成物に含有される他の成分(例えば、重合開始剤、金属酸化物粒子等)との相溶性、分散性に対しても、重合性化合物の選択・使用法は重要な要因であり、例えば、低純度化合物の使用や、2種以上の他の成分の併用により相溶性を向上させうることがある。また、基板などの硬質表面との密着性を向上させる目的で特定の構造を選択することもあり得る。
About these polymeric compounds, the details of usage methods, such as the structure, single use, combined use, and addition amount, can be arbitrarily set according to the final performance design of the composition for cured film formation. For example, it is selected from the following viewpoints.
From the viewpoint of sensitivity, a structure having a large unsaturated group content per molecule is preferable, and in many cases, a bifunctional or higher functionality is preferable. Further, in order to increase the strength of the cured film, those having three or more functionalities are preferable, and further, different functional numbers and different polymerizable groups (for example, acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, styrene compound, vinyl ether compound). A method of adjusting both sensitivity and intensity by using a combination of these materials is also effective.
In addition, selection and use of polymerizable compounds are important for compatibility and dispersibility with other components (eg, polymerization initiators, metal oxide particles, etc.) contained in the composition for forming a cured film. For example, the compatibility may be improved by using a low-purity compound or using two or more other components in combination. In addition, a specific structure may be selected for the purpose of improving adhesion to a hard surface such as a substrate.
 硬化膜形成用組成物の全固形分に対して、(C)重合性化合物の含有量は、1質量%~40質量%の範囲であることが好ましく、3質量%~35質量%の範囲であることがより好ましく、5質量%~30質量%の範囲であることが更に好ましい。
 この範囲内であると、屈折率を低下させることなく、硬化性が良好で好ましい。
The content of the polymerizable compound (C) is preferably in the range of 1% by mass to 40% by mass and preferably in the range of 3% by mass to 35% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition for forming a cured film. More preferably, it is more preferably in the range of 5% by mass to 30% by mass.
Within this range, the curability is good and preferable without lowering the refractive index.
((D)溶媒)
 硬化膜形成用組成物には、溶媒が含まれていてもよい。
 使用される溶媒の種類は特に制限されず、公知の溶媒(水又は有機溶媒)が挙げられる。有機溶媒としては、例えば、アルコール系溶媒(例えば、メタノール、エタノール、イソプロパノール、)、ケトン系溶媒(例えば、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン)、芳香族炭化水素溶媒(例えば、トルエン、キシレン)、アミド系溶媒(例えば、ホルムアミド、ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン)、ニトリル系溶媒(例えば、アセトニトリル、プロピオニトリル)、エステル系溶媒(例えば、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル)、カーボネート系溶媒(例えば、ジメチルカーボネート、ジエチルカーボネート)、エーテル系溶媒、ハロゲン系溶媒などが挙げられる。これらの溶媒を、2種以上混合して使用してもよい。特に、スピン塗布時の塗布面状が良好である、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、シクロヘキサノン、エチルエトキシプロピオネートを溶媒の主成分として含有することが好ましい。
((D) solvent)
The composition for forming a cured film may contain a solvent.
The kind in particular of solvent used is not restrict | limited, A well-known solvent (water or organic solvent) is mentioned. Examples of organic solvents include alcohol solvents (eg, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol), ketone solvents (eg, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone), aromatic hydrocarbon solvents (eg, toluene, xylene), amide solvents. (Eg, formamide, dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone), nitrile solvents (eg, acetonitrile, propionitrile), ester solvents (eg, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate), carbonate solvents (eg, dimethyl carbonate, diethyl) Carbonate), ether solvents, halogen solvents and the like. Two or more of these solvents may be mixed and used. In particular, it is preferable to contain propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, cyclohexanone, and ethyl ethoxypropionate as the main components of the solvent, which have a good coating surface state during spin coating.
((E)重合開始剤)
 硬化膜形成用組成物は、更に重合開始剤を含有することが、さらなる硬化性向上の観点から好ましい。重合開始剤としては、以下に述べる重合開始剤として知られているものを用いることができる。
 重合開始剤としては、重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。
 また、重合開始剤は、約300nm~500nm(330nm~400nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50の分子吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
((E) polymerization initiator)
It is preferable from the viewpoint of further improving the curability that the composition for forming a cured film further contains a polymerization initiator. As the polymerization initiator, those known as polymerization initiators described below can be used.
The polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known polymerization initiators.
The polymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 500 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 400 nm).
 重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を有するもの、など)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノンなどが挙げられる。
 これらの具体例として、特開2010-106268号の公報段落[0135](対応する米国特許出願公開第2011/0124824号明細書の[0163])以降の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the polymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime derivatives, etc. Oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, hydroxyacetophenones, and the like.
As specific examples thereof, the description after paragraph [0135] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-106268 (corresponding to [0163] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2011/0124824) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Embedded in the book.
 重合開始剤としては、オキシム系化合物も好適に用いることができる。オキシム系開始剤の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報記載の化合物を用いることができる。 As the polymerization initiator, an oxime compound can also be suitably used. Specific examples of the oxime initiator include compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A 2006-342166.
 重合開始剤として好適に用いられるオキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイロキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オンなどが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives that are suitably used as polymerization initiators include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, and 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2- ON, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) ) Iminobutan-2-one and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
 オキシムエステル化合物としては、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660)、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、Journal of Applied Polymer Science(2012年)pp.725-731、特開2000-66385号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等が挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。
Examples of oxime ester compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, Journal of Applied Polymer Science (2012) pp. 725-731, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
As commercially available products, IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) are also preferably used.
 また上記記載以外のオキシムエステル化合物として、カルバゾールN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物、ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許7626957号公報に記載の化合物、色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報及び米国特許公開2009-292039号記載の化合物、国際公開特許2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム系化合物、トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号公報に記載の化合物、405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報記載の化合物などを用いてもよい。 Further, as oxime ester compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-T-2009-519904 in which oxime is linked to carbazole N-position, compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety, A compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced into the dye moiety, a ketoxime compound described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189, the triazine skeleton and the oxime skeleton are the same A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained in the molecule, a compound described in JP 2009-221114 A having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-ray light source may be used.
 さらに、特開2007-231000号公報、及び、特開2007-322744号公報に記載される環状オキシム化合物も好適に用いることができる。環状オキシム化合物の中でも、特に特開2010-32985号公報、特開2010-185072号公報に記載されるカルバゾール色素に縮環した環状オキシム化合物は、高い光吸収性を有し高感度化の観点から好ましい。
 また、オキシム化合物の特定部位に不飽和結合を有する特開2009-242469号公報に記載の化合物も、重合不活性ラジカルから活性ラジカルを再生することで高感度化を達成でき好適に使用することができる。
Furthermore, the cyclic oxime compounds described in JP2007-231000A and JP2007-322744A can also be suitably used. Among cyclic oxime compounds, in particular, cyclic oxime compounds fused to carbazole dyes described in JP2010-32985A and JP2010-185072A have high light absorptivity and high sensitivity. preferable.
Further, the compounds described in JP-A-2009-242469 having an unsaturated bond at a specific site of the oxime compound can be preferably used because high sensitivity can be achieved by regenerating the active radical from the polymerization inert radical. it can.
 他にも、特開2007-269779号公報に示される特定置換基を有するオキシム化合物や、特開2009-191061号公報に示されるチオアリール基を有するオキシム化合物が挙げられる。
 オキシム開始剤としては、特開2012-208494号公報段落0513(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/235099号明細書の[0632])以降の式(OX-1)、(OX-2)または(OX-3)で表される化合物の説明を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition, an oxime compound having a specific substituent described in JP-A-2007-267979 and an oxime compound having a thioaryl group disclosed in JP-A-2009-191061 can be used.
As an oxime initiator, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-208494, paragraph 0513 (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]) and the following formulas (OX-1), (OX-2) or ( The description of the compound represented by OX-3) can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 オキシム化合物は、350nm~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものであり、360nm~480nmの波長領域に吸収波長を有するものであることが好ましく、365nm及び455nmの吸光度が高いものが特に好ましい。 The oxime compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, preferably has an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 455 nm.
 オキシム化合物は、365nm又は405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが特に好ましい。
 化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いることができるが、具体的には、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Carry-5 spctrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is particularly preferred.
A known method can be used for the molar extinction coefficient of the compound. Specifically, for example, 0.01 g of an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Varian Inc., Carry-5 spctrophotometer) is used with an ethyl acetate solvent. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of / L.
 重合開始剤は、必要に応じて2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。 Polymerization initiators may be used in combination of two or more as required.
 重合開始剤としては、硬化性の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 As the polymerization initiator, from the viewpoint of curability, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallyl. Selected from the group consisting of imidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds. Compounds are preferred.
 さらに好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、ベンゾフェノン化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも一種の化合物が最も好ましい。 More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketones Most preferred is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimer, and benzophenone compounds.
 重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を使用することが特に好ましい。特に、固体撮像素子において微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑えることが要求されるため、これらの点を考慮すれば、固体撮像素子の如き微細パターンを形成するには、重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物を用いることが最も好ましい。 It is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the polymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, stepper exposure is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and it is required to keep the addition amount of a polymerization initiator low. Therefore, considering these points, it is most preferable to use an oxime compound as a polymerization initiator in order to form a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
 硬化膜形成組成物に含有される重合開始剤の含有量(2種以上の場合は総含有量)は、硬化膜形成組成物の全固形分に対し0.1質量%以上40質量%以下であることが好ましく、より好ましくは0.5質量%以上20質量%以下、更に好ましくは1質量%以上15質量%以下である。この範囲で、良好な硬化性が得られる。 The content of the polymerization initiator contained in the cured film forming composition (the total content in the case of 2 or more types) is 0.1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less with respect to the total solid content of the cured film forming composition. Preferably, it is 0.5 mass% or more and 20 mass% or less, more preferably 1 mass% or more and 15 mass% or less. Within this range, good curability can be obtained.
((F)増感剤)
 硬化膜形成用組成物は、重合開始剤のラジカル発生効率の向上、感光波長の長波長化の目的で、増感剤を含有していてもよい。増感剤としては、上述した重合開始剤に対し、電子移動機構又はエネルギー移動機構で増感させるものが好ましい。
 増感剤としては、特開2012-255148号公報の段落[0228]~[0250]に記載のものが挙げられる。
((F) sensitizer)
The composition for forming a cured film may contain a sensitizer for the purpose of improving the radical generation efficiency of the polymerization initiator and increasing the photosensitive wavelength. As a sensitizer, what sensitizes with the electron transfer mechanism or an energy transfer mechanism with respect to the polymerization initiator mentioned above is preferable.
Examples of the sensitizer include those described in paragraphs [0228] to [0250] of JP2012-255148A.
((G)共増感剤)
 硬化膜形成用組成物は、更に共増感剤を含有することも好ましい。共増感剤は、上述した重合開始剤や増感剤の活性放射線に対する感度を一層向上させる、あるいは、酸素による重合性化合物の重合阻害を抑制する等の作用を有する。
 共増感剤としては、特開2012-255148号公報の段落[0252]~[0256]に記載のものが挙げられる。
((G) co-sensitizer)
The composition for forming a cured film preferably further contains a co-sensitizer. The co-sensitizer has functions such as further improving the sensitivity of the polymerization initiator and sensitizer described above to actinic radiation, or suppressing polymerization inhibition of the polymerizable compound by oxygen.
Examples of the co-sensitizer include those described in paragraphs [0252] to [0256] of JP2012-255148A.
((H)重合禁止剤)
 硬化膜形成用組成物の製造中あるいは保存中において重合可能なエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物の不要な重合を阻止するために、重合禁止剤を添加することが好ましい。
 重合禁止剤としては、フェノール系水酸基含有化合物、N-オキシド化合物類、ピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類、ピロリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン類、ジアゾニウム化合物類、及びカチオン染料類、スルフィド基含有化合物類、ニトロ基含有化合物類、FeCl3、CuCl2等の遷移金属化合物類が挙げられる。
((H) polymerization inhibitor)
In order to prevent unnecessary polymerization of a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond that is polymerizable during the production or storage of the composition for forming a cured film, it is preferable to add a polymerization inhibitor.
Polymerization inhibitors include phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compounds, N-oxide compounds, piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines, diazonium compounds, and cations Examples include dyes, sulfide group-containing compounds, nitro group-containing compounds, transition metal compounds such as FeCl 3 and CuCl 2 .
 さらに好ましい態様としては、以下の通りである。
 フェノール系水酸基含有化合物が、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-4-メチルフェノール(BHT)、フェノール樹脂類、及びクレゾール樹脂類からなる群より選択される化合物であるのが好ましい。
Further preferred embodiments are as follows.
The phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compound is hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), Selected from the group consisting of 2,2'-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,6-di-t-butyl-4-methylphenol (BHT), phenolic resins, and cresol resins It is preferable that it is a compound.
 N-オキシド化合物類が、5,5-ジメチル-1-ピロリンN-オキシド、4-メチルモルホリンN-オキシド、ピリジンN-オキシド、4-ニトロピリジンN-オキシド、3-ヒドロキシピリジンN-オキシド、ピコリン酸N-オキシド、ニコチン酸N-オキシド、及びイソニコチン酸N-オキシドからなる群より選択される化合物であるのが好ましい。 N-oxide compounds include 5,5-dimethyl-1-pyrroline N-oxide, 4-methylmorpholine N-oxide, pyridine N-oxide, 4-nitropyridine N-oxide, 3-hydroxypyridine N-oxide, picoline A compound selected from the group consisting of acid N-oxide, nicotinic acid N-oxide, and isonicotinic acid N-oxide is preferred.
 ピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類が、ピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-オキソ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-アセトアミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-マレイミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、及び4-ホスホノキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカルからなる群より選択される化合物であるのが好ましい。 Piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds include piperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-oxo-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1 -Oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-acetamido-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-maleimide A compound selected from the group consisting of -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical and 4-phosphonoxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical Is preferred.
 ピロリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類が、3-カルボキシプロキシルフリーラジカル(3-カルボキシ-2,2,5,5-テトラメチルピロリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル)であるのが好ましい。 The pyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical compound is preferably a 3-carboxyproxyl free radical (3-carboxy-2,2,5,5-tetramethylpyrrolidine 1-oxyl free radical).
 N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン類が、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン第一セリウム塩及びN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩からなる化合物群から選択される化合物であるのが好ましい。 The N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamines are preferably compounds selected from the group consisting of N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine cerium salts and N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salts.
 ジアゾニウム化合物類が、4-ジアゾフェニルジメチルアミンの硫酸水素塩、4-ジアゾジフェニルアミンのテトラフルオロホウ酸塩、及び3-メトキシ-4-ジアゾジフェニルアミンのヘキサフルオロリン酸塩からなる群より選択される化合物であるのが好ましい。 The diazonium compound is selected from the group consisting of 4-diazophenyldimethylamine hydrogen sulfate, 4-diazodiphenylamine tetrafluoroborate, and 3-methoxy-4-diazodiphenylamine hexafluorophosphate Is preferred.
 好適な重合禁止剤を以下に例示するが、本発明はこれらに制限されるものではない。なおフェノール系重合禁止剤としては、下記例示化合物(P-1)~(P-24)が挙げられる。 Suitable polymerization inhibitors are exemplified below, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Examples of phenolic polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplified compounds (P-1) to (P-24).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 アミン系重合禁止剤としては、下記例示化合物(N-1)~(N-7)が挙げられる。 Examples of amine polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (N-1) to (N-7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
 硫黄系重合禁止剤としては、下記例示化合物(S-1)~(S-5)が挙げられる。 Examples of sulfur polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (S-1) to (S-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 フォスファイト系重合禁止剤としては、下記例示化合物(R-1)~(R-5)が挙げられる。 Examples of phosphite polymerization inhibitors include the following exemplary compounds (R-1) to (R-5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 さらに、以下に示す各化合物もまた、好適な重合禁止剤として使用しうる。 Furthermore, each compound shown below can also be used as a suitable polymerization inhibitor.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
 上記例示化合物のなかでも、好ましくは、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)のフェノール系水酸基含有化合物、ピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物類若しくは、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-オキソ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-アセトアミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-マレイミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、及び4-ホスホノキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカルのピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物、若しくはN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン第一セリウム塩及びN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩のN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン化合物であり、より好ましくは、2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-オキソ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-アセトアミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、4-マレイミド-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル、及び4-ホスホノキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカルのピペリジン1-オキシルフリーラジカル化合物、若しくはN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン第一セリウム塩及びN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩のN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン化合物であり、更に好ましくは、-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン第一セリウム塩及びN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩のN-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン化合物である。 Among the above exemplified compounds, hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-) are preferable. Butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol) phenolic hydroxyl group-containing compounds, piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compounds, or 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Oxyl free radical, 4-oxo-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-acetamido- 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxylfuryl Piperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-maleimido-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, and 4-phosphonoxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical A radical compound, or an N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine compound of N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine primary cerium salt and N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt, more preferably 2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1 -Oxyl free radical, 4-oxo-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-acetamide -2, 2, 6 6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, 4-maleimido-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxyl free radical, and 4-phosphonoxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine 1- Piperidine 1-oxyl free radical compound of oxyl free radical, or N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine compound of N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine cerium salt and N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt, more preferably -nitrosophenyl N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine compound of hydroxylamine primary cerium salt and N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt.
 重合禁止剤の好ましい添加量としては、重合開始剤100質量部に対して、0.01質量部以上10質量部以下であることが好ましく、更に0.01質量部以上8質量部以下であることが好ましく、0.05質量部以上5質量部以下の範囲にあることが最も好ましい。 A preferable addition amount of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.01 parts by mass or more and 8 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the polymerization initiator. And most preferably in the range of 0.05 parts by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less.
((I)バインダーポリマー)
 硬化膜には、皮膜特性向上などの観点から、更にバインダーポリマーを含むことが好ましい。なお、硬化膜にバインダーポリマーを含有させる方法としては、上述した硬化膜形成用組成物にバインダーポリマーを含有させる方法がある。
 バインダーポリマーとしては、線状有機ポリマーを用いることが好ましい。このような線状有機ポリマーとしては、公知のものを任意に使用できる。好ましくは水現像あるいは弱アルカリ水現像を可能とするために、水あるいは弱アルカリ水に可溶性又は膨潤性である線状有機ポリマーが選択される。線状有機ポリマーは、皮膜形成剤としてだけでなく、水、弱アルカリ水あるいは有機溶剤現像剤としての用途に応じて選択使用される。例えば、水可溶性有機ポリマーを用いると水現像が可能になる。このような線状有機ポリマーとしては、側鎖にカルボン酸基を有するラジカル重合体、例えば特開昭59-44615号公報、特公昭54-34327号公報、特公昭58-12577号公報、特公昭54-25957号公報、特開昭54-92723号公報、特開昭59-53836号公報、特開昭59-71048号公報に記載されているもの、すなわち、カルボキシル基を有するモノマーを単独あるいは共重合させた樹脂、酸無水物を有するモノマーを単独あるいは共重合させ酸無水物ユニットを加水分解若しくはハーフエステル化若しくはハーフアミド化させた樹脂、エポキシ樹脂を不飽和モノカルボン酸及び酸無水物で変性させたエポキシアクリレート等が挙げられる。カルボキシル基を有するモノマーとしては、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、4-カルボキシルスチレン等があげられ、酸無水物を有するモノマーとしては、無水マレイン酸等が挙げられる。
 また、同様に側鎖にカルボン酸基を有する酸性セルロース誘導体がある。この他に水酸基を有する重合体に環状酸無水物を付加させたものなどが有用である。
((I) Binder polymer)
The cured film preferably further contains a binder polymer from the viewpoint of improving the film properties. In addition, as a method of making a cured film contain a binder polymer, there exists the method of containing a binder polymer in the composition for cured film formation mentioned above.
As the binder polymer, a linear organic polymer is preferably used. As such a linear organic polymer, a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily. Preferably, a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is selected to enable water development or weak alkaline water development. The linear organic polymer is selected and used not only as a film forming agent but also according to the use as water, weak alkaline water or an organic solvent developer. For example, when a water-soluble organic polymer is used, water development becomes possible. Examples of such a linear organic polymer include radical polymers having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, and JP-B-sho. No. 54-25957, JP-A-54-92723, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, ie, a monomer having a carboxyl group alone or in combination. Polymerized resin, acid anhydride monomer alone or copolymerized, acid anhydride unit hydrolyzed, half-esterified or half-amidated, epoxy resin modified with unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and acid anhydride And epoxy acrylate. Examples of the monomer having a carboxyl group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxylstyrene. Examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride. It is done.
Similarly, there is an acidic cellulose derivative having a carboxylic acid group in the side chain. In addition, those obtained by adding a cyclic acid anhydride to a polymer having a hydroxyl group are useful.
 バインダーポリマーとして、共重合体を用いる場合、共重合させる化合物として、先にあげたモノマー以外の他のモノマーを用いることもできる。他のモノマーの例としては、下記(1)~(12)の化合物が挙げられる。 When a copolymer is used as the binder polymer, a monomer other than the above-mentioned monomers can be used as the compound to be copolymerized. Examples of other monomers include the following compounds (1) to (12).
 (1)2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピルアクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピルアクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチルアクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピルメタクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピルメタクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチルメタクリレート等の脂肪族水酸基を有するアクリル酸エステル類、及びメタクリル酸エステル類。
 (2)アクリル酸メチル、アクリル酸エチル、アクリル酸プロピル、アクリル酸ブチル、アクリル酸イソブチル、アクリル酸アミル、アクリル酸ヘキシル、アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、アクリル酸オクチル、アクリル酸ベンジル、アクリル酸-2-クロロエチル、グリシジルアクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチルアクリレート、ビニルアクリレート、2-フェニルビニルアクリレート、1-プロペニルアクリレート、アリルアクリレート、2-アリロキシエチルアクリレート、プロパルギルアクリレート等のアルキルアクリレート。
(1) 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate Acrylic acid esters and methacrylic acid esters having an aliphatic hydroxyl group such as
(2) Methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, propyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, isobutyl acrylate, amyl acrylate, hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, octyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, acrylic acid-2- Alkyl acrylates such as chloroethyl, glycidyl acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl acrylate, vinyl acrylate, 2-phenylvinyl acrylate, 1-propenyl acrylate, allyl acrylate, 2-allyloxyethyl acrylate, propargyl acrylate;
 (3)メタクリル酸メチル、メタクリル酸エチル、メタクリル酸プロピル、メタクリル酸ブチル、メタクリル酸イソブチル、メタクリル酸アミル、メタクリル酸ヘキシル、メタクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル、メタクリル酸ベンジル、メタクリル酸-2-クロロエチル、グリシジルメタクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチルメタクリレート、ビニルメタクリレート、2-フェニルビニルメタクリレート、1-プロペニルメタクリレート、アリルメタクリレート、2-アリロキシエチルメタクリレート、プロパルギルメタクリレート等のアルキルメタクリレート。
 (4)アクリルアミド、メタクリルアミド、N-メチロールアクリルアミド、N-エチルアクリルアミド、N-ヘキシルメタクリルアミド、N-シクロヘキシルアクリルアミド、N-ヒドロキシエチルアクリルアミド、N-フェニルアクリルアミド、N-ニトロフェニルアクリルアミド、N-エチル-N-フェニルアクリルアミド、ビニルアクリルアミド、ビニルメタクリルアミド、N,N-ジアリルアクリルアミド、N,N-ジアリルメタクリルアミド、アリルアクリルアミド、アリルメタクリルアミド等のアクリルアミド若しくはメタクリルアミド。
(3) Methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, propyl methacrylate, butyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, amyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, benzyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid-2- Alkyl methacrylates such as chloroethyl, glycidyl methacrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl methacrylate, vinyl methacrylate, 2-phenylvinyl methacrylate, 1-propenyl methacrylate, allyl methacrylate, 2-allyloxyethyl methacrylate, and propargyl methacrylate;
(4) Acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-methylolacrylamide, N-ethylacrylamide, N-hexylmethacrylamide, N-cyclohexylacrylamide, N-hydroxyethylacrylamide, N-phenylacrylamide, N-nitrophenylacrylamide, N-ethyl- Acrylamide or methacrylamide such as N-phenylacrylamide, vinylacrylamide, vinylmethacrylamide, N, N-diallylacrylamide, N, N-diallylmethacrylamide, allylacrylamide, allylmethacrylamide.
 (5)エチルビニルエーテル、2-クロロエチルビニルエーテル、ヒドロキシエチルビニルエーテル、プロピルビニルエーテル、ブチルビニルエーテル、オクチルビニルエーテル、フェニルビニルエーテル等のビニルエーテル類。
 (6)ビニルアセテート、ビニルクロロアセテート、ビニルブチレート、安息香酸ビニル等のビニルエステル類。
 (7)スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、メチルスチレン、クロロメチルスチレン、p-アセトキシスチレン等のスチレン類。
 (8)メチルビニルケトン、エチルビニルケトン、プロピルビニルケトン、フェニルビニルケトン等のビニルケトン類。
 (9)エチレン、プロピレン、イソブチレン、ブタジエン、イソプレン等のオレフィン類。
(5) Vinyl ethers such as ethyl vinyl ether, 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether, hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, propyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, octyl vinyl ether, and phenyl vinyl ether.
(6) Vinyl esters such as vinyl acetate, vinyl chloroacetate, vinyl butyrate and vinyl benzoate.
(7) Styrenes such as styrene, α-methylstyrene, methylstyrene, chloromethylstyrene, and p-acetoxystyrene.
(8) Vinyl ketones such as methyl vinyl ketone, ethyl vinyl ketone, propyl vinyl ketone, and phenyl vinyl ketone.
(9) Olefins such as ethylene, propylene, isobutylene, butadiene, and isoprene.
 (10)N-ビニルピロリドン、アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル等。
 (11)マレイミド、N-アクリロイルアクリルアミド、N-アセチルメタクリルアミド、N-プロピオニルメタクリルアミド、N-(p-クロロベンゾイル)メタクリルアミド等の不飽和イミド。
 (12)α位にヘテロ原子が結合したメタクリル酸系モノマー。例えば、特開2002-309057号、特開2002-311569号等の各公報に記載の化合物を挙げる事ができる。
(10) N-vinylpyrrolidone, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile and the like.
(11) Unsaturated imides such as maleimide, N-acryloylacrylamide, N-acetylmethacrylamide, N-propionylmethacrylamide, N- (p-chlorobenzoyl) methacrylamide.
(12) A methacrylic acid monomer having a hetero atom bonded to the α-position. For example, compounds described in JP-A-2002-309057, JP-A-2002-311569 and the like can be mentioned.
 本発明において、これらのモノマーは本発明の範囲内において特に制限なく組み合わせることによって、共重合体の合成に適用できる。例えば下記にこれらのモノマーを含む単量体成分を重合してなる共重合体の一例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。下記に示す例示化合物の組成比はモル%である。 In the present invention, these monomers can be applied to the synthesis of a copolymer by combining them without particular limitation within the scope of the present invention. For example, although an example of the copolymer formed by polymerizing the monomer component containing these monomers is shown below, this invention is not limited to this. The composition ratio of the exemplary compounds shown below is mol%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 バインダーポリマーには、下記一般式(ED)で表される化合物(以下「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)を必須とする単量体成分を重合してなる繰り返し単位を含むことも好ましい。 The binder polymer preferably contains a repeating unit obtained by polymerizing a monomer component essentially comprising a compound represented by the following general formula (ED) (hereinafter also referred to as “ether dimer”).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
 式(ED)中、R1及びR2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。 In the formula (ED), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
 これにより、硬化膜形成用組成物は、耐熱性と共に透明性にも極めて優れた硬化塗膜を形成しうる。エーテルダイマーを示す一般式(ED)中、R1及びR2で表される置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、メチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、n-ブチル、イソブチル、t-ブチル、t-アミル、ステアリル、ラウリル、2-エチルヘキシル等の直鎖状又は分岐状のアルキル基;フェニル等のアリール基;シクロヘキシル、t-ブチルシクロヘキシル、ジシクロペンタジエニル、トリシクロデカニル、イソボルニル、アダマンチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチル等の脂環式基;1-メトキシエチル、1-エトキシエチル等のアルコキシで置換されたアルキル基;ベンジル等のアリール基で置換されたアルキル基;等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、メチル、エチル、シクロヘキシル、ベンジル等のような酸や熱で脱離しにくい1級又は2級炭素の置換基が耐熱性の点で好ましい。 Thereby, the composition for cured film formation can form the cured coating film which was very excellent also in transparency with heat resistance. In the general formula (ED) showing an ether dimer, the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent represented by R 1 and R 2 is not particularly limited, but for example, methyl Linear, branched alkyl groups such as ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, t-amyl, stearyl, lauryl, 2-ethylhexyl; aryl groups such as phenyl; cyclohexyl, substituted with alicyclic groups such as t-butylcyclohexyl, dicyclopentadienyl, tricyclodecanyl, isobornyl, adamantyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl; alkoxy such as 1-methoxyethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl Alkyl group; an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group such as benzyl; and the like. Among these, an acid such as methyl, ethyl, cyclohexyl, benzyl or the like, or a primary or secondary carbon substituent which is difficult to be removed by heat is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例としては、例えば、ジメチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジエチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(n-プロピル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソプロピル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(n-ブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(t-ブチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(t-アミル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ステアリル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ラウリル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(2-エチルヘキシル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(1-メトキシエチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(1-エトキシエチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジベンジル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジフェニル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(t-ブチルシクロヘキシル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(ジシクロペンタジエニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(トリシクロデカニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(イソボルニル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジアダマンチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジ(2-メチル-2-アダマンチル)-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、ジメチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジエチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジシクロヘキシル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート、ジベンジル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエートが好ましい。これらエーテルダイマーは、1種のみ使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。また、一般式(ED)で示される化合物由来の構造体は、その他のモノマーを共重合させてもよい。 Specific examples of ether dimers include, for example, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di ( n-propyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isopropyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (n-butyl) -2,2 '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobutyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (t-butyl) -2,2 '-[Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (t-amyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoe Di (stearyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (lauryl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (2- Ethylhexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1-methoxyethyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (1-ethoxy) Ethyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diphenyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene) )] Bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (t-butyl) Dicyclohexyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (dicyclopentadienyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (tri Cyclodecanyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, di (isobornyl) -2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diadamantyl-2,2 Examples include '-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and di (2-methyl-2-adamantyl) -2,2'-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate. Among these, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, diethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate, dicyclohexyl-2,2′- [Oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate and dibenzyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate are preferred. These ether dimers may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Moreover, the structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (ED) may be copolymerized with other monomers.
 エーテルダイマーと共に共重合しうるその他の単量体としては、例えば、酸性基を導入するための単量体、ラジカル重合性二重結合を導入するための単量体、エポキシ基を導入するための単量体、及び、これら以外の他の共重合可能な単量体が挙げられる。このような単量体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を用いてもよい。 Other monomers that can be copolymerized with the ether dimer include, for example, a monomer for introducing an acidic group, a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, and an epoxy group. Monomers and other copolymerizable monomers other than these may be mentioned. Only 1 type may be used for such a monomer and it may use 2 or more types.
 酸性基を導入するための単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸やイタコン酸等のカルボキシル基を有するモノマー、N-ヒドロキシフェニルマレイミド等のフェノール性水酸基を有するモノマー、無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸等のカルボン酸無水物基を有するモノマー等が挙げられる。これらの中でも特に、(メタ)アクリル酸が好ましい。
 また、酸性基を導入するための単量体は、重合後に酸性基を付与しうる単量体であってもよく、例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の水酸基を有する単量体、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート等のエポキシ基を有する単量体、2-イソシアナートエチル(メタ)アクリレート等のイソシアネート基を有する単量体等が挙げられる。ラジカル重合性二重結合を導入するための単量体を用いる場合、重合後に酸性基を付与しうる単量体を用いる場合、重合後に酸性基を付与する処理を行うことが要求され得る。重合後に酸性基を付与する処理は、単量体の種類によって異なり、例えば、次の処理が挙げられる。水酸基を有する単量体を用いる場合であれば、例えば、コハク酸無水物、テトラヒドロフタル酸無水物、マレイン酸無水物等の酸無水物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。エポキシ基を有する単量体を用いる場合であれば、例えば、N-メチルアミノ安息香酸、N-メチルアミノフェノール等のアミノ基と酸性基を有する化合物を付加させか、又は、例えば(メタ)アクリル酸のような酸を付加させた後に生じた水酸基に、例えば、コハク酸無水物、テトラヒドロフタル酸無水物、マレイン酸無水物等の酸無水物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。イソシアネート基を有する単量体を用いる場合であれば、例えば、2-ヒドロキシ酪酸等の水酸基と酸性基を有する化合物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。
Examples of the monomer for introducing an acidic group include monomers having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid and itaconic acid, monomers having a phenolic hydroxyl group such as N-hydroxyphenylmaleimide, maleic anhydride, and anhydride. And monomers having a carboxylic anhydride group such as itaconic acid. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable.
The monomer for introducing an acidic group may be a monomer that can give an acidic group after polymerization, such as a monomer having a hydroxyl group such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, Examples thereof include monomers having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, and monomers having an isocyanate group such as 2-isocyanatoethyl (meth) acrylate. When using a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, when using a monomer capable of imparting an acidic group after polymerization, it may be required to perform a treatment for imparting an acidic group after polymerization. The treatment for imparting acidic groups after polymerization varies depending on the type of monomer, and examples thereof include the following treatment. In the case of using a monomer having a hydroxyl group, for example, a treatment of adding an acid anhydride such as succinic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, maleic anhydride or the like can be mentioned. When using a monomer having an epoxy group, for example, a compound having an amino group and an acidic group such as N-methylaminobenzoic acid or N-methylaminophenol is added, or, for example, (meth) acrylic For example, a treatment of adding an acid anhydride such as succinic acid anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic acid anhydride, maleic acid anhydride to the hydroxyl group generated after adding an acid such as an acid can be mentioned. In the case of using a monomer having an isocyanate group, for example, a treatment of adding a compound having a hydroxyl group and an acidic group such as 2-hydroxybutyric acid can be mentioned.
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体が、酸性基を導入するための単量体を含む場合、その含有割合は、特に制限されないが、全単量体成分中、5~70質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは10~60質量%である。 When the polymer formed by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) contains a monomer for introducing an acidic group, the content ratio is not particularly limited, In the monomer component, the content is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass.
 ラジカル重合性二重結合を導入するための単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、イタコン酸等のカルボキシル基を有するモノマー;無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸等のカルボン酸無水物基を有するモノマー;グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、o-(又はm-、又はp-)ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基を有するモノマー;等が挙げられる。ラジカル重合性二重結合を導入するための単量体を用いる場合、重合後にラジカル重合性二重結合を付与するための処理を行う必要がある。重合後にラジカル重合性二重結合を付与するための処理は、用いるラジカル重合性二重結合を付与しうるモノマーの種類によって異なり、例えば、次の処理が挙げられる。(メタ)アクリル酸やイタコン酸等のカルボキシル基を有するモノマーを用いる場合であれば、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、o-(又はm-、又はp-)ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基とラジカル重合性二重結合とを有する化合物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。無水マレイン酸や無水イタコン酸等のカルボン酸無水物基を有するモノマーを用いる場合であれば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の水酸基とラジカル重合性二重結合とを有する化合物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、o-(又はm-、又はp-)ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基を有するモノマーを用いる場合であれば、(メタ)アクリル酸等の酸性基とラジカル重合性二重結合とを有する化合物を付加させる処理が挙げられる。 Examples of the monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond include monomers having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid and itaconic acid; and carboxylic acid anhydride groups such as maleic anhydride and itaconic anhydride. Monomers having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and the like. When using a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, it is necessary to perform a treatment for imparting a radical polymerizable double bond after polymerization. The treatment for imparting a radical polymerizable double bond after polymerization differs depending on the type of monomer that can impart a radical polymerizable double bond to be used, and examples thereof include the following treatment. When using a monomer having a carboxyl group such as (meth) acrylic acid or itaconic acid, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p- ) Treatment of adding a compound having an epoxy group such as vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether and a radically polymerizable double bond. When using a monomer having a carboxylic acid anhydride group such as maleic anhydride or itaconic anhydride, a treatment for adding a compound having a hydroxyl group and a radical polymerizable double bond such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate Is mentioned. If a monomer having an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether is used, (meth) The process which adds the compound which has acidic groups, such as acrylic acid, and a radically polymerizable double bond is mentioned.
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体が、ラジカル重合性二重結合を導入するための単量体を含む場合、その含有割合は、特に制限されないが、全単量体成分中、5~70質量量%が好ましく、より好ましくは10~60質量%である。 When the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) contains a monomer for introducing a radical polymerizable double bond, the content ratio is particularly limited. However, it is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass in the total monomer components.
 エポキシ基を導入するための単量体としては、例えば、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、o-(又はm-、又はp-)ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体が、エポキシ基を導入するための単量体を含む場合、その含有割合は、特に制限されないが、全単量体成分中、5~70質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは10~60質量%である。
Examples of the monomer for introducing an epoxy group include glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate, o- (or m-, or p-) vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and the like. Can be mentioned.
When the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) contains a monomer for introducing an epoxy group, the content ratio is not particularly limited, In the monomer component, the content is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, more preferably 10 to 60% by mass.
 他の共重合可能な単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル等の(メタ)アクリル酸エステル類;スチレン、ビニルトルエン、α-メチルスチレン等の芳香族ビニル化合物;N-フェニルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド等のN-置換マレイミド類;ブタジエン、イソプレン等のブタジエン又は置換ブタジエン化合物;エチレン、プロピレン、塩化ビニル、アクリロニトリル等のエチレン又は置換エチレン化合物;酢酸ビニル等のビニルエステル類;等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、スチレンが、透明性が良好で、耐熱性を損ないにくい点で好ましい。 Other copolymerizable monomers include, for example, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n (meth) acrylate -Butyl, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, t-butyl (meth) acrylate, methyl 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acrylic acid 2- (Meth) acrylic acid esters such as hydroxyethyl; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene, vinyltoluene and α-methylstyrene; N-substituted maleimides such as N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide; butadiene, isoprene and the like Butadiene or substituted butadiene compounds; ethylene, propylene, vinyl chloride Ethylene or substituted ethylene compound such as acrylonitrile, vinyl esters such as vinyl acetate; and the like. Among these, methyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and styrene are preferable in terms of good transparency and resistance to heat resistance.
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体が、他の共重合可能な単量体を含む場合、その含有割合は特に制限されないが、95質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下であるのがより好ましい。 When the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) contains another copolymerizable monomer, the content ratio is not particularly limited, but is 95% by mass. The following is preferable, and it is more preferable that it is 85 mass% or less.
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体の重量平均分子量は、特に制限されないが、硬化膜形成用組成物の粘度、及び該組成物により形成される塗膜の耐熱性の観点から、好ましくは2000~200000、より好ましくは5000~100000であり、更に好ましくは5000~20000である。
 また、一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体が酸性基を有する場合には、酸価が、好ましくは30~500mgKOH/g、より好ましくは50~400mgKOH/gであるのがよい。
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) is not particularly limited, but is formed by the viscosity of the composition for forming a cured film and the composition. From the viewpoint of heat resistance of the coating film, it is preferably 2000 to 200000, more preferably 5000 to 100,000, and still more preferably 5000 to 20000.
When the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) has an acidic group, the acid value is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 It should be ˜400 mg KOH / g.
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体は、少なくとも、エーテルダイマーを必須とする上記の単量体を重合することにより、容易に得ることができる。このとき、重合と同時にエーテルダイマーの環化反応が進行してテトラヒドロピラン環構造が形成される。
 一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体の合成に適用される重合方法としては、特に制限はなく、従来公知の各種重合方法を採用することができるが、特に、溶液重合法によることが好ましい。詳細には、例えば、特開204-300204号公報に記載されるポリマー(a)の合成方法に準じて、一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体を合成することができる。
A polymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) can be easily obtained by polymerizing at least the above-mentioned monomer essentially comprising an ether dimer. . At this time, the cyclization reaction of the ether dimer proceeds simultaneously with the polymerization to form a tetrahydropyran ring structure.
The polymerization method applied to the synthesis of the polymer obtained by polymerizing the monomer component containing the compound represented by the general formula (ED) is not particularly limited, and various conventionally known polymerization methods can be adopted. However, it is particularly preferable to use a solution polymerization method. Specifically, for example, in accordance with the method for synthesizing the polymer (a) described in JP-A-204-300204, a polymer formed by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) A coalescence can be synthesized.
 以下、一般式(ED)で表される化合物を含む単量体成分を重合してなる重合体の例示化合物を示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。下記に示す例示化合物の組成比はモル%である。 Hereinafter, exemplary compounds of a polymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer component containing a compound represented by the general formula (ED) are shown, but the present invention is not limited to these. The composition ratio of the exemplary compounds shown below is mol%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 本発明では特に、ジメチル-2,2’-[オキシビス(メチレン)]ビス-2-プロペノエート(以下「DM」と称する)、ベンジルメタクリレート(以下「BzMA」と称する)、メタクリル酸メチル(以下「MMA」と称する)、メタクリル酸(以下「MAA」と称する)、グリシジルメタクリレート(以下「GMA」と称する)を共重合させた重合体が好ましい。特に、DM:BzMA:MMA:MAA:GMAのモル比が5~15:40~50:5~15:5~15:20~30であることが好ましい。本発明で用いる共重合体を構成する成分の95質量%以上がこれらの成分であることが好ましい。また、重合体の重量平均分子量は9000~20000であることが好ましい。
 本発明で用いる重合体は、重量平均分子量(GPC法で測定されたポリスチレン換算値)が1000~2×105であることが好ましく、2000~1×105であることがより好ましく、5000~5×104であることがさらに好ましい。
In the present invention, in particular, dimethyl-2,2 ′-[oxybis (methylene)] bis-2-propenoate (hereinafter referred to as “DM”), benzyl methacrylate (hereinafter referred to as “BzMA”), methyl methacrylate (hereinafter referred to as “MMA”). ), Methacrylic acid (hereinafter referred to as “MAA”), and glycidyl methacrylate (hereinafter referred to as “GMA”). In particular, the molar ratio of DM: BzMA: MMA: MAA: GMA is preferably 5 to 15:40 to 50: 5 to 15: 5 to 15:20 to 30. It is preferable that 95% by mass or more of the components constituting the copolymer used in the present invention is these components. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer is preferably 9000 to 20000.
The polymer used in the present invention has a weight average molecular weight (polystyrene conversion value measured by GPC method) of preferably 1000 to 2 × 10 5 , more preferably 2000 to 1 × 10 5 , and more preferably 5000 to More preferably, it is 5 × 10 4 .
 これらの中で、側鎖にアリル基やビニルエステル基とカルボキシル基を有する(メタ)アクリル樹脂及び特開2000-187322号公報、特開2002-62698号公報に記載されている側鎖に二重結合を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂や、特開2001-242612号公報に記載されている側鎖にアミド基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂が膜強度、感度、現像性のバランスに優れており、好適である。上述のポリマーの例としては、ダイヤナ-ルNRシリーズ(三菱レイヨン株式会社製)、Photomer6173(COOH含有 polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co.Ltd.,製)、ビスコートR-264、KSレジスト106(いずれも大阪有機化学工業株式会社製)、サイクロマーP ACA230AA等のサイクロマーPシリーズ、プラクセル CF200シリーズ(いずれもダイセル化学工業株式会社製)、Ebecryl3800(ダイセルユーシービー株式会社製)などが挙げられる。 Among these, a (meth) acrylic resin having an allyl group, a vinyl ester group, and a carboxyl group in the side chain, and a side chain described in JP-A Nos. 2000-187322 and 2002-62698 are doubled. An alkali-soluble resin having a bond and an alkali-soluble resin having an amide group in the side chain described in JP-A No. 2001-242612 are preferable because of excellent balance of film strength, sensitivity, and developability. Examples of the above-mentioned polymers include: Dial NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer. Diamond Shamrock Co. Ltd., biscort R-264, KS resist 106 (all) Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P, Cyclomer P series such as ACA230AA, Plaxel CF200 series (both manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Corporation), and the like.
 また、特公平7-12004号公報、特公平7-120041号公報、特公平7-120042号公報、特公平8-12424号公報、特開昭63-287944号公報、特開昭63-287947号公報、特開平1-271741号公報等に記載される酸性基を含有するウレタン系バインダーポリマーや、特開2002-107918号公報に記載される酸性基と二重結合を側鎖に有するウレタン系バインダーポリマーは、非常に、強度に優れるので、膜強度の点で有利である。
 また、欧州特許第993966号、欧州特許第1204000号、特開2001-318463号公報等に記載の酸性基を有するアセタール変性ポリビニルアルコール系バインダーポリマーも、膜強度に優れており、好適である。
 更にこの他に水溶性線状有機ポリマーとして、ポリビニルピロリドンやポリエチレンオキサイド等が有用である。また硬化皮膜の強度を上げるためにアルコール可溶性ナイロンや2,2-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-プロパンとエピクロロヒドリンのポリエーテル等も有用である。
Also, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-12004, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-120041, Japanese Patent Publication No. 7-120042, Japanese Patent Publication No. 8-12424, Japanese Patent Publication No. 63-287944, Japanese Patent Publication No. 63-287947. Urethane binder polymers containing acidic groups as described in JP-A No. 1-271741, etc., and urethane binders having acidic groups and double bonds in side chains as described in JP-A No. 2002-107918. Since the polymer is very excellent in strength, it is advantageous in terms of film strength.
In addition, acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder polymers having an acidic group described in European Patent No. 993966, European Patent No. 1204000, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-318463 are also preferable because of excellent film strength.
In addition, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene oxide, and the like are useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer. In order to increase the strength of the cured film, alcohol-soluble nylon, polyether of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin are also useful.
 バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(GPC法で測定されたポリスチレン換算値)としては、好ましくは5,000以上であり、更に好ましくは1万以上30万以下の範囲であり、数平均分子量については好ましくは1,000以上であり、更に好ましくは2,000以上25万以下の範囲である。多分散度(重量平均分子量/数平均分子量)は1以上が好ましく、更に好ましくは1.1以上10以下の範囲である。
 これらのバインダーポリマーは、ランダムポリマー、ブロックポリマー、グラフトポリマー等いずれでもよい。
The weight average molecular weight (polystyrene equivalent value measured by GPC method) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 300,000, and the number average molecular weight is preferably It is 1,000 or more, More preferably, it is the range of 2,000 or more and 250,000 or less. The polydispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 1.1 or more and 10 or less.
These binder polymers may be any of random polymers, block polymers, graft polymers and the like.
 バインダーポリマーは、従来公知の方法により合成できる。合成する際に用いられる溶媒としては、例えば、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレンジクロリド、シクロヘキサノン、メチルエチルケトン、アセトン、メタノール、エタノール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、2-メトキシエチルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、トルエン、酢酸エチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、ジメチルスルホキシド、水等が挙げられる。これらの溶媒は単独で又は2種以上混合して用いられる。
 バインダーポリマーを合成する際に用いられるラジカル重合開始剤としては、アゾ系開始剤、過酸化物開始剤等公知の化合物が挙げられる。
The binder polymer can be synthesized by a conventionally known method. Examples of the solvent used in the synthesis include tetrahydrofuran, ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, 1-methoxy. Examples include -2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, toluene, ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, dimethyl sulfoxide, water and the like. These solvents are used alone or in combination of two or more.
Examples of the radical polymerization initiator used when the binder polymer is synthesized include known compounds such as an azo initiator and a peroxide initiator.
 バインダーポリマーは、1種単独で、あるいは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 The binder polymer can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 硬化膜には、バインダーポリマーを含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、バインダーポリマーの含有量は、硬化膜全質量に対して、1質量%以上40質量%以下であることが好ましく、3質量%以上30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、4質量%以上20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、バインダーポリマーが硬化膜形成用組成物に含まれる場合は、硬化膜形成用組成物の全固形分に対して、上記含有量となることが好ましい。
The cured film may or may not contain a binder polymer, but when it is contained, the content of the binder polymer is preferably 1% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less based on the total mass of the cured film. It is more preferably 3% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, and further preferably 4% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less.
In addition, when a binder polymer is contained in the composition for cured film formation, it becomes preferable that it becomes the said content with respect to the total solid of the composition for cured film formation.
((J)界面活性剤)
 硬化膜形成用組成物には、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤が添加されていてもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
((J) Surfactant)
Various surfactants may be added to the composition for forming a cured film from the viewpoint of further improving applicability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
 特に、硬化膜形成用組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
 即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する硬化膜形成用組成物を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μm程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。
In particular, the composition for forming a cured film contains a fluorosurfactant, so that liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating solution are further improved. Liquidity can be further improved.
That is, when forming a film using a composition for forming a cured film containing a fluorosurfactant, the wettability to the coated surface is reduced by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid. It improves and the applicability | paintability to a to-be-coated surface improves. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3質量%~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5質量%~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7質量%~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、硬化膜形成用組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a composition for forming a cured film. .
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、同F781(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, F780, F781 (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, Same SC-103, Same SC-104, Same SC-105, Same SC1068, Same SC-381, Same SC-383, Same S393, Same KH-40 (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320 PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), and the like.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、特開2012-208494号公報の段落0553(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0679])等に記載のノニオン系界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the nonionic surfactant include nonionic surfactants described in paragraph 0553 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099 [0679]) and the like. The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、特開2012-208494号公報の段落0554(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0680])に記載のカチオン系界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include the cationic surfactant described in paragraph 0554 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to [0680] of the corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099). The contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製「トーレシリコーンDC3PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH7PA」、「トーレシリコーンDC11PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH21PA」,「トーレシリコーンSH28PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH29PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH30PA」、「トーレシリコーンSH8400」、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製「TSF-4440」、「TSF-4300」、「TSF-4445」、「TSF-4460」、「TSF-4452」、信越シリコーン株式会社製「KP341」、「KF6001」、「KF6002」、ビックケミー社製「BYK307」、「BYK323」、「BYK330」等が挙げられる。
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
Examples of the silicone surfactant include “Toray Silicone DC3PA”, “Toray Silicone SH7PA”, “Tore Silicone DC11PA”, “Tore Silicone SH21PA”, “Tore Silicone SH28PA”, “Toray Silicone” manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd. Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400, Momentive Performance Materials TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF -4552 "," KP341 "," KF6001 "," KF6002 "manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.," BYK307 "," BYK323 "," BYK330 "manufactured by BYK Chemie.
Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
 硬化膜形成用組成物は、界面活性剤を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、界面活性剤の添加量は、硬化膜形成用組成物の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005質量%~1.0質量%である。 The composition for forming a cured film may or may not contain a surfactant, but when it is contained, the addition amount of the surfactant is 0.001 with respect to the total mass of the composition for forming a cured film. The content is preferably from mass% to 2.0 mass%, more preferably from 0.005 mass% to 1.0 mass%.
((K)その他の添加剤)
 更に、硬化膜形成用組成物に対しては、硬化皮膜の物性を改良するために可塑剤や感脂化剤等の公知の添加剤を加えてもよい。
 可塑剤としては、例えば、ジオクチルフタレート、ジドデシルフタレート、トリエチレングリコールジカプリレート、ジメチルグリコールフタレート、トリクレジルホスフェート、ジオクチルアジペート、ジブチルセバケート、トリアセチルグリセリン等があり、バインダーポリマーを使用した場合、重合性化合物とバインダーポリマーとの合計質量に対し10質量%以下添加することができる。
((K) Other additives)
Furthermore, you may add well-known additives, such as a plasticizer and a fat-sensitizing agent, in order to improve the physical property of a cured film with respect to the composition for cured film formation.
Examples of plasticizers include dioctyl phthalate, didodecyl phthalate, triethylene glycol dicaprylate, dimethyl glycol phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctyl adipate, dibutyl sebacate, and triacetyl glycerin. , 10% by mass or less can be added with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound and the binder polymer.
<着色層形成工程>
 着色層形成工程は、硬化膜上に、着色層を形成する工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(c)に示すように、硬化膜20の上に着色層21が形成される。着色層21は、本発明におけるカラーフィルタの画素の少なくとも1種を構成することができ、着色剤を含有する硬化性組成物によって形成されることが好ましい。より具体的には、着色層形成工程では、着色剤を含有する硬化性組成物を硬化膜上に直接又は他の層を介して塗布し、その後乾燥して塗布膜を形成する工程(塗膜形成工程)と、加熱処理を施す工程(ポストベーク工程)とを含むことが可能である。
 以下では、硬化性組成物を使用した態様について、詳述する。
<Colored layer forming step>
The colored layer forming step is a step of forming a colored layer on the cured film.
More specifically, the colored layer 21 is formed on the cured film 20 as shown in FIG. The colored layer 21 can constitute at least one of the pixels of the color filter in the present invention, and is preferably formed of a curable composition containing a colorant. More specifically, in the colored layer forming step, a curable composition containing a colorant is applied directly or via another layer on the cured film, and then dried to form a coated film (coating film) Forming step) and a step of performing heat treatment (post-baking step).
Below, the aspect using a curable composition is explained in full detail.
(硬化性組成物)
 硬化性組成物としては、着色光硬化性組成物、又は、非感光性の着色熱硬化性組成物を挙げることができ、分光特性の観点から、着色層は、非感光性の着色熱硬化性組成物を用いて形成されることが好ましい。
(Curable composition)
Examples of the curable composition include a colored photocurable composition or a non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition. From the viewpoint of spectral characteristics, the colored layer is a non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition. It is preferably formed using a composition.
 非感光性の着色熱硬化性組成物としては、着色剤と、熱硬化性化合物とを含み、全固形分中の着色剤濃度が50質量%以上100質量%未満であることが好ましい。
 また、着色光硬化性組成物としては、着色剤、光硬化性成分を少なくとも含むものであって、この内「光硬化性成分」としては、フォトリソ法に通常用いられる光硬化性組成物であり、バインダー樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂等)、感光性重合成分(光重合成モノマー等)、光重合開始剤等を少なくとも含む組成物を用いることができる。
 着色光硬化性組成物については、例えば、特開2005-326453号公報の段落番号0017~0064に記載の事項を好適に適用することができる。
The non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition contains a colorant and a thermosetting compound, and the colorant concentration in the total solid content is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass.
Further, the colored photocurable composition contains at least a colorant and a photocurable component, and among these, the “photocurable component” is a photocurable composition usually used in a photolithographic method. A composition containing at least a binder resin (alkali-soluble resin or the like), a photosensitive polymerization component (such as a photopolymerization monomer) or a photopolymerization initiator can be used.
For the colored photocurable composition, for example, the matters described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0064 of JP-A-2005-326453 can be suitably applied.
(着色剤)
 着色層に使用される着色光硬化性組成物又は非感光性の着色熱硬化性組成物に含まれる着色剤としては、特に限定されず、従来公知の種々の染料や顔料を1種又は2種以上混合して用いることができる。
 顔料としては、従来公知の種々の無機顔料又は有機顔料を挙げることができる。また、無機顔料であれ有機顔料であれ、高透過率であることが好ましいことを考慮すると、平均粒子径がなるべく小さい顔料の使用が好ましく、ハンドリング性をも考慮すると、上記顔料の平均粒子径は、0.01μm~0.1μmが好ましく、0.01μm~0.05μmがより好ましい。
(Coloring agent)
The colorant contained in the colored photocurable composition or the non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition used in the colored layer is not particularly limited, and one or two kinds of conventionally known various dyes and pigments are used. A mixture of the above can be used.
Examples of the pigment include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 μm to 0.1 μm is preferable, and 0.01 μm to 0.05 μm is more preferable.
 好ましく用いることができる顔料として、以下のものを挙げることができる。但し本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。
C.I.ピグメント・イエロー11,24,108,109,110,138,139,150,151,154,167,180,185;
C.I.ピグメント・オレンジ36,71;
C.I.ピグメント・レッド122,150,171,175,177,209,224,242,254,255,264;
C.I.ピグメント・バイオレット19,23,32;
C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15:1,15:3,15:6,16,22,60,66;
C.I.ピグメント・ブラック1
 また、着色剤が染料である場合には、組成物中に均一に溶解して非感光性の熱硬化性着色樹脂組成物を得ることができる。
The following can be mentioned as a pigment which can be preferably used. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
C. I. Pigment yellow 11,24,108,109,110,138,139,150,151,154,167,180,185;
C. I. Pigment orange 36, 71;
C. I. Pigment red 122,150,171,175,177,209,224,242,254,255,264;
C. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 32;
C. I. Pigment blue 15: 1, 15: 3, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 66;
C. I. Pigment Black 1
Further, when the colorant is a dye, it can be dissolved uniformly in the composition to obtain a non-photosensitive thermosetting colored resin composition.
 着色剤として使用できる染料は特に制限はなく、従来カラーフィルタ用として公知の染料が使用できる。
 化学構造としては、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリフェニルメタン系、アントラキノン系、アンスラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサテン系、フタロシアニン系、ペンゾピラン系、インジゴ系等の染料が使用できる。
The dye that can be used as the colorant is not particularly limited, and conventionally known dyes for color filters can be used.
The chemical structure includes pyrazole azo, anilino azo, triphenyl methane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, Xanthene-based, phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based and indigo-based dyes can be used.
 本発明における着色熱硬化性組成物の全固形分中の着色剤含有率は特に限定されるものではないが、好ましくは50質量%以上100質量%未満であり、55質量%以上90質量%以下がより好ましい。50質量%以上とすることでカラーフィルタとして適度な色度を得ることができる。また、100質量%未満とすることで光硬化を充分に進めることができ、膜としての強度低下を抑制することができる。 The colorant content in the total solid content of the colored thermosetting composition in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or more and less than 100% by mass, and 55% by mass or more and 90% by mass or less. Is more preferable. When the content is 50% by mass or more, an appropriate chromaticity as a color filter can be obtained. Moreover, photocuring can fully be advanced by setting it as less than 100 mass%, and the strength reduction as a film | membrane can be suppressed.
(熱硬化性化合物)
 非感光性の着色熱硬化性組成物に含まれる熱硬化性化合物としては、加熱により膜硬化を行えるものであれば特に限定はなく、例えば、熱硬化性官能基を有する化合物を用いることができる。熱硬化性化合物としては、例えば、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基及びアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基を有するものが好ましい。
 更に好ましい熱硬化性化合物としては、(a)エポキシ化合物、(b)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基及びアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、メラミン化合物、グアナミン化合物、グリコールウリル化合物又はウレア化合物、(c)メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基及びアシロキシメチル基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの置換基で置換された、フェノール化合物、ナフトール化合物又はヒドロキシアントラセン化合物、が挙げられる。中でも、熱硬化性化合物としては、多官能エポキシ化合物が特に好ましい。
 着色熱硬化性組成物中における熱硬化性化合物の総含有量としては、素材により異なるが、着色熱硬化性組成物の全固形分(質量)に対して、0.1~50質量%が好ましく、0.2~40質量%がより好ましく、1~35質量%が特に好ましい。
(Thermosetting compound)
The thermosetting compound contained in the non-photosensitive colored thermosetting composition is not particularly limited as long as the film can be cured by heating. For example, a compound having a thermosetting functional group can be used. . As the thermosetting compound, for example, those having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group are preferable.
More preferable thermosetting compounds include (a) an epoxy compound, (b) a melamine compound, a guanamine compound, and a glycoluril substituted with at least one substituent selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, and an acyloxymethyl group. Examples thereof include a compound or a urea compound, (c) a phenol compound, a naphthol compound or a hydroxyanthracene compound substituted with at least one substituent selected from a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group and an acyloxymethyl group. Among these, a polyfunctional epoxy compound is particularly preferable as the thermosetting compound.
The total content of the thermosetting compound in the colored thermosetting composition varies depending on the material, but is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the colored thermosetting composition. 0.2 to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 1 to 35% by mass is particularly preferable.
 着色熱硬化性組成物には、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、バインダー、硬化剤、硬化触媒、溶剤、充填剤、上記以外の高分子化合物、界面活性剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤、分散剤、等を配合することができる。
 バインダーとしては、顔料分散液調製時に添加する場合が多く、アルカリ可溶性を必要とせず、有機溶剤に可溶であればよく、線状有機高分子重合体で、有機溶剤に可溶であるものが好ましい。このような線状有機高分子重合体としては、側鎖にカルボン酸を有するポリマー、例えば、特開昭59-44615号、特公昭54-34327号、特公昭58-12577号、特公昭54-25957号、特開昭59-53836号、特開昭59-71048号の各公報に記載されているような、メタクリル酸共重合体、アクリル酸共重合体、イタコン酸共重合体、クロトン酸共重合体、マレイン酸共重合体、部分エステル化マレイン酸共重合体等が挙げられ、また同様に側鎖にカルボン酸を有する酸性セルロース誘導体が有用である。
In the colored thermosetting composition, various additives such as a binder, a curing agent, a curing catalyst, a solvent, a filler, a polymer compound other than the above, as necessary, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. Surfactants, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, aggregation inhibitors, dispersants, and the like can be blended.
The binder is often added at the time of preparing the pigment dispersion, does not need alkali solubility, and may be soluble in an organic solvent, and is a linear organic high molecular polymer that is soluble in an organic solvent. preferable. Examples of such linear organic high molecular polymers include polymers having a carboxylic acid in the side chain, such as JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12577, JP-B-54-. No. 25957, JP-A-59-53836, JP-A-59-71048, methacrylic acid copolymer, acrylic acid copolymer, itaconic acid copolymer, crotonic acid copolymer, etc. Examples thereof include polymers, maleic acid copolymers, partially esterified maleic acid copolymers, and acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxylic acid in the side chain are also useful.
 これら各種バインダーの中でも、耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、アクリル系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、アクリル/アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂が好ましい。
 特に、アクリル系樹脂としては、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル酸、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリルアミド等から選ばれるモノマーからなる共重合体、例えば、ベンジルメタアクリレート/メタアクリル酸、ベンジルメタアクリレート/ベンジルメタアクリルアミドのような各共重合体、KSレジスト-106(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)、サイクロマーPシリーズ(ダイセル化学工業(株)製)等が好ましい。
 これらのバインダー中に着色剤を高濃度に分散させることで、下層等との密着性を付与でき、これらはスピンコート、スリットコート時の塗布面状にも寄与している。
Among these various binders, from the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferable. Acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
In particular, acrylic resins include copolymers consisting of monomers selected from benzyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylamide, and the like, such as benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic. Preferred are acids, copolymers such as benzyl methacrylate / benzyl methacrylate, KS resist-106 (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), cyclomer P series (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), and the like.
By dispersing the colorant in these binders at a high concentration, it is possible to impart adhesion to the lower layer and the like, which also contributes to the coated surface state during spin coating and slit coating.
 本発明において、熱硬化性化合物として、エポキシ樹脂を使用する場合、硬化剤を添加することが好ましい。エポキシ樹脂の硬化剤は種類が非常に多く、性質、樹脂と硬化剤の混合物との可使時間、粘度、硬化温度、硬化時間、発熱などが使用する硬化剤の種類によって非常に異なるため、硬化剤の使用目的、使用条件、作業条件などによって適当な硬化剤を選ばねばならない。硬化剤に関しては垣内弘編「エポキシ樹脂(昇晃堂)」第5章に詳しく解説されている。硬化剤の例を挙げると以下のようになる。
 触媒的に作用するものとしては、第三アミン類、三フッ化ホウ素-アミンコンプレックス、エポキシ樹脂の官能基と化学量論的に反応するものとして、ポリアミン、酸無水物等;また、常温硬化のものとして、ジエチレントリアミン、ポリアミド樹脂、中温硬化のものの例としてジエチルアミノプロピルアミン、トリス(ジメチルアミノメチル)フェノール;高温硬化の例として、無水フタル酸、メタフェニレンジアミン等がある。また化学構造別に見るとアミン類では、脂肪族ポリアミンとしてはジエチレントリアミン;芳香族ポリアミンとしてはメタフェニレンジアミン;第三アミンとしてはトリス(ジメチルアミノメチル)フェノール;酸無水物としては無水フタル酸、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリスルフィド樹脂、三フッ化ホウ素-モノエチルアミンコンプレックス;合成樹脂初期縮合物としてはフェノール樹脂、その他ジシアンジアミド等が挙げられる。
In this invention, when using an epoxy resin as a thermosetting compound, it is preferable to add a hardening | curing agent. There are many types of curing agents for epoxy resins, and their properties, pot life with resin and curing agent mixture, viscosity, curing temperature, curing time, heat generation, etc. vary greatly depending on the type of curing agent used. An appropriate curing agent must be selected according to the purpose of use, use conditions, working conditions, and the like. The hardener is described in detail in Chapter 5 of Hiroshi Kakiuchi “Epoxy resin (Shojodo)”. Examples of curing agents are as follows.
Those that act catalytically include tertiary amines, boron trifluoride-amine complexes, those that react stoichiometrically with functional groups of epoxy resins, polyamines, acid anhydrides, etc .; Examples include diethylenetriamine, polyamide resin, and medium temperature curing examples such as diethylaminopropylamine and tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol; examples of high temperature curing include phthalic anhydride and metaphenylenediamine. In terms of chemical structure, in the case of amines, diethylenetriamine as an aliphatic polyamine; metaphenylenediamine as an aromatic polyamine; tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol as a tertiary amine; phthalic anhydride as an acid anhydride; polyamide resin Polysulfide resin, boron trifluoride-monoethylamine complex; Synthetic resin initial condensate includes phenol resin, dicyandiamide and the like.
 これら硬化剤は、加熱によりエポキシ基と反応し、重合することによって架橋密度が上がり硬化するものである。薄膜化のためには、バインダー、硬化剤とも極力少量の方が好ましく、特に硬化剤に関しては熱硬化性化合物に対して35質量%以下、好ましくは30質量%以下、さらに好ましくは25質量%以下とすることが好ましい。
 本発明において高い着色剤濃度を実現するためには、硬化剤との反応による硬化の他、主としてエポキシ基同士の反応による硬化が有効である。このため、硬化剤は用いず、硬化触媒を使用することもできる。硬化触媒の添加量としてはエポキシ当量が150~200程度のエポキシ樹脂に対して、質量基準で1/10~1/1000程度、好ましくは1/20~1/500程度さらに好ましくは1/30~1/250程度のわずかな量で硬化させることが可能である。
These curing agents react with an epoxy group by heating and polymerize to increase the crosslinking density and cure. For thinning, both the binder and the curing agent are preferably as small as possible. In particular, the curing agent is 35% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less with respect to the thermosetting compound. It is preferable that
In order to realize a high colorant concentration in the present invention, curing by reaction between epoxy groups is effective in addition to curing by reaction with a curing agent. For this reason, a curing catalyst can be used without using a curing agent. The addition amount of the curing catalyst is about 1/10 to 1/1000, preferably about 1/20 to 1/500, more preferably about 1/30 to 1 / 1,000 to mass of the epoxy resin having an epoxy equivalent of about 150 to 200. It is possible to cure with a slight amount of about 1/250.
 着色熱硬化性組成物は、各種溶剤に溶解された溶液として用いることができる。溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色熱硬化性組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的に特に限定されない。
 また、顔料の分散性を向上させるために、分散剤を添加することができる。分散剤としては、公知のものを適宜選定して用いることができ、例えば、カチオン系界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤、高分子分散剤等が挙げられる。
 これらの分散剤としては、多くの種類の化合物が用いられるが、例えば、フタロシアニン誘導体(市販品EFKA-745(エフカ社製))、ソルスパース5000(日本ルーブリゾール社製);オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等のカチオン系界面活性剤;ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル等のノニオン系界面活性剤;W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)製)等のアニオン系界面活性剤;EFKA-46、EFKA-47、EFKA-47EA、EFKAポリマー100、EFKAポリマー400、EFKAポリマー401、EFKAポリマー450(以上森下産業(株)製)、ディスパースエイド6、ディスパースエイド8、ディスパースエイド15、ディスパースエイド9100(サンノプコ(株)製)等の高分子分散剤;ソルスパース3000、5000、9000、12000、13240、13940、17000、24000、26000、28000などの各種ソルスパース分散剤(日本ルーブリゾール社製);アデカプルロニックL31、F38、L42、L44、L61、L64、F68、L72、P95、F77、P84、F87、P94、L101、P103、F108、L121、P-123(旭電化(株)製)及びイソネットS-20(三洋化成(株)製)が挙げられる。
 分散剤は、単独で用いてもよくまた2種以上組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 分散剤の着色熱硬化性組成物中の添加量は、通常顔料100質量部に対して0.1~50質量部程度が好ましい。
The colored thermosetting composition can be used as a solution dissolved in various solvents. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the colored thermosetting composition are satisfied.
Moreover, in order to improve the dispersibility of a pigment, a dispersing agent can be added. As the dispersant, known ones can be appropriately selected and used, and examples thereof include a cationic surfactant, a fluorosurfactant, and a polymer dispersant.
As these dispersants, many kinds of compounds are used. For example, a phthalocyanine derivative (commercial product EFKA-745 (manufactured by Efka)), Solsperse 5000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol); organosiloxane polymer KP341 (Shin-Etsu) Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid (co) polymer polyflow No. 75, No. 90, No. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.), etc. Cationic surfactants of: polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octyl phenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonyl phenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid Nonionic surfactants such as Steal; anionic surfactants such as W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.); EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, Polymer dispersing agents such as EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450 (manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disperse Aid 9100 (manufactured by San Nopco); Solsperse 3000, 5000, 9000, 12000, 13240, 13940, 17000, 24000, 26000, 28000, etc. L 2, P95, F77, P84, F87, P94, L101, P103, F108, L121, P-123 (manufactured by Asahi Denka Co.) and Isonetto S-20 (manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Co.) and the like.
A dispersing agent may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
The amount of the dispersant added to the colored thermosetting composition is usually preferably about 0.1 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
 本発明における着色熱硬化性組成物には、必要に応じて各種添加剤を更に添加することができる。各種添加物の具体例としては、例えば、上記特開2005-326453号公報に記載の各種添加剤を挙げることができる。 Various additives can be further added to the colored thermosetting composition in the present invention as necessary. Specific examples of various additives include, for example, various additives described in JP-A-2005-326453.
 本発明における着色層は、例えば、上記の着色熱硬化性組成物を硬化膜上に塗布し、乾燥して形成することができる。具体的には、例えば、着色熱硬化性組成物を、硬化膜上に回転塗布、スリット塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布等の塗布方法により塗布して形成することができる。
 着色層の具体的な厚さとしては、0.005μm~0.9μmが好ましく、0.05μm~0.8μmが好ましく、0.1μm~0.7μmで作製されることが更に好ましい。
The colored layer in the present invention can be formed, for example, by applying the above colored thermosetting composition on a cured film and drying it. Specifically, for example, a colored thermosetting composition can be formed by coating on a cured film by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating, cast coating, roll coating, or the like.
The specific thickness of the colored layer is preferably 0.005 μm to 0.9 μm, more preferably 0.05 μm to 0.8 μm, and still more preferably 0.1 μm to 0.7 μm.
 着色層形成工程は、加熱工程(ポストベーク工程であってもよい)を更に含むことが好ましい。具体的に着色層は、着色熱硬化性組成物を支持体に塗布して塗布膜を形成した後、加熱工程により、該塗布膜を熱硬化させて形成することができる。
 加熱工程は塗布後の乾燥と同時であってもよく、また塗布乾燥後に別途熱硬化の工程を設けてもよい。加熱工程は、オーブン、ホットプレートなど公知の加熱手段を用い、好ましくは130℃~300℃、更に好ましくは150℃~280℃、特に好ましくは170℃~260℃の条件下で、好ましくは10秒~3時間、更に好ましくは30秒~2時間、特に好ましくは60秒~60分の範囲で行うことができる。但し、製造を考慮すると硬化に要する時間は短時間であるほど好ましい。
The colored layer forming step preferably further includes a heating step (may be a post-baking step). Specifically, the colored layer can be formed by applying a colored thermosetting composition to a support to form a coating film, and then thermally curing the coating film by a heating step.
The heating step may be performed at the same time as drying after coating, or a separate thermosetting step may be provided after coating and drying. The heating step uses a known heating means such as an oven or a hot plate, preferably 130 ° C. to 300 ° C., more preferably 150 ° C. to 280 ° C., particularly preferably 170 ° C. to 260 ° C., preferably 10 seconds. It can be carried out for 3 hours, more preferably 30 seconds to 2 hours, particularly preferably 60 seconds to 60 minutes. However, considering the production, the time required for curing is preferably as short as possible.
<フォトレジスト層形成工程>
 フォトレジスト層形成工程は、上記着色層上に、フォトレジスト層を形成する工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(d)に示されるように、着色層形成工程で着色層21が形成された後、この着色層21上にフォトレジスト層22(感光性樹脂層)が更に形成される。
<Photoresist layer formation process>
The photoresist layer forming step is a step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2D, after the colored layer 21 is formed in the colored layer forming step, a photoresist layer 22 (photosensitive resin layer) is further formed on the colored layer 21. Is done.
 フォトレジスト層の形成方法は特に制限されないが、着色層上にポジ又はネガ型の感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、これを乾燥させてフォトレジスト層が形成されることが好ましい。また、フォトレジスト層の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を行うことが好ましい。
 以下、上記好適なフォトレジスト層の形成方法について詳述する。
The method for forming the photoresist layer is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that a positive or negative photosensitive resin composition is applied on the colored layer and dried to form the photoresist layer. Further, in the formation of the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment.
Hereinafter, the preferred method for forming a photoresist layer will be described in detail.
 ポジ又はネガ型の感光性樹脂組成物としては、例えば、特開2007-11324号公報の段落番号0112~0117に記載の事項を本発明においても好適に適用することができる。 As the positive or negative photosensitive resin composition, for example, the matters described in paragraph numbers 0112 to 0117 of JP-A No. 2007-11324 can be preferably applied to the present invention.
 感光性樹脂組成物の塗布方法としては、既述の塗布方法を好適に用いることができる。また、感光性樹脂層の具体的な厚さとしては、0.01μm~3μmが好ましく、0.1μm~2.5μmがより好ましく、0.15μm~2μmで形成されることが更に好ましい。 As the coating method of the photosensitive resin composition, the above-described coating method can be suitably used. The specific thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.01 μm to 3 μm, more preferably 0.1 μm to 2.5 μm, and still more preferably 0.15 μm to 2 μm.
 ポジ型の感光性樹脂組成物としては、紫外線(g線、i線)、エキシマー・レーザー等を含む遠紫外線、電子線、イオンビーム及びX線等の放射線に感応するポジ型フォトレジスト用に好適なポジ型レジスト組成物が使用できる。放射線のうち、感光性樹脂層を露光するものとしては、本発明の目的からは、g線、i線が好ましく、中でもi線露光が好ましい。 As a positive type photosensitive resin composition, suitable for positive type photoresists sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays. A positive resist composition can be used. Of the radiation, the one that exposes the photosensitive resin layer is preferably g-line or i-line for the purpose of the present invention, and i-line exposure is particularly preferable.
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法においては、フォトレジスト層より形成されるレジストパターンをマスクとして、後述するエッチング工程でエッチング処理することにより、着色層を所望の形状(例えば、矩形)に形成することができる。 In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, a colored layer is formed into a desired shape (for example, a rectangle) by performing an etching process in an etching process described later using a resist pattern formed from a photoresist layer as a mask. Can do.
<パターン形成工程>
 パターン形成工程は、上記で作製したフォトレジスト層をパターン様に除去することにより、着色層上にレジストパターンを形成する工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(e)に示されるように、フォトレジスト層22を所望のパターン、例えば着色層21とは異なる色からなる第2の着色層が硬化膜20上に形成される領域に対応するパターン様に露光し、現像液で現像してエッチング用マスクとして機能するレジストパターン24(フォトレジストパターン)を形成する。
 パターン形成工程により、パターン様に第1の着色層となる着色層21の表面(金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜20と着色層21とが対向する側とは反対側の面)が露出することになる。一方、着色層21のうち、第2の着色層を金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜20上に形成する領域以外の領域はレジストパターン24で被覆された状態となっている。
 パターン形成工程後、エッチング等の各工程を実施し、着色層21をパターン様に形成し、再び各工程を経て第2の着色層を金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜20上に形成することで、エッチングされてパターン様に形成された着色層21によって構成される画素に加えて、更にもう1種類の画素が形成される。
<Pattern formation process>
The pattern forming step is a step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer prepared above in a pattern-like manner.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2 (e), the photoresist layer 22 has a desired pattern, for example, a second colored layer having a color different from that of the colored layer 21 is formed on the cured film 20. A pattern corresponding to the region is exposed and developed with a developer to form a resist pattern 24 (photoresist pattern) that functions as an etching mask.
By the pattern formation step, the surface of the colored layer 21 that becomes the first colored layer in a pattern-like manner (the surface opposite to the side where the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles and the colored layer 21 face each other) is exposed. It will be. On the other hand, in the colored layer 21, a region other than a region where the second colored layer is formed on the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles is covered with the resist pattern 24.
After the pattern formation step, each step such as etching is performed, the colored layer 21 is formed in a pattern, and the second colored layer is formed on the cured film 20 containing metal oxide particles again through each step. Thus, in addition to the pixel constituted by the colored layer 21 that has been etched and formed in a pattern, another type of pixel is formed.
 マスク材となるレジストパターン24は微細化が可能であり、かつ矩形性を有しているため、カラーフィルタの各画素を微細かつ矩形に形成することができる。
 フォトレジスト層22の露光は、所定(画像様)のマスクパターンを介して、ポジ型又はネガ型の感光性樹脂組成物に、g線、h線、i線等、好ましくはi線で露光を施すことによって行われる。
 現像液としては、着色剤を含む着色層21には影響を与えず、ポジレジストの露光部及びネガレジストの未硬化部を溶解するものであればいかなるものも用いることができる。具体的には、種々の有機溶剤の組合せやアルカリ性の水溶液を用いることができる。
Since the resist pattern 24 serving as a mask material can be miniaturized and has rectangularity, each pixel of the color filter can be formed in a fine and rectangular shape.
The photoresist layer 22 is exposed to a positive or negative photosensitive resin composition through a predetermined (image-like) mask pattern, such as g-line, h-line, i-line, preferably i-line. Done by applying.
Any developer can be used as long as it does not affect the colored layer 21 containing the colorant and dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist. Specifically, a combination of various organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
<エッチング工程>
 エッチング工程は、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして、エッチングガスを用いたドライエッチング法によって着色層をエッチングする工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(f)に示すように、エッチングガスを用いたドライエッチング法(例えば、プラズマエッチング処理等。ドライエッチング法の代表的な例としては、特開昭59-126506号、特開昭59-46628号、同58-9108号、同58-2809号、同57-148706号、同61-41102号などの公報に記載されているような方法が知られている。)により、レジストパターン24で覆われていない着色層21を除去して、パターン状の着色層が形成される。言い換えれば、パターン形成工程によって形成されたレジストパターン24様に、硬化膜露出部26が形成される。
<Etching process>
The etching step is a step of etching the colored layer by a dry etching method using an etching gas using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2 (f), a dry etching method using an etching gas (for example, a plasma etching process, etc.) As a typical example of the dry etching method, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-126506 is disclosed. JP-A-59-46628, 58-9108, 58-2809, 57-148706, 61-41102, and the like are known.) Thus, the colored layer 21 not covered with the resist pattern 24 is removed, and a patterned colored layer is formed. In other words, the cured film exposed portion 26 is formed like the resist pattern 24 formed by the pattern forming process.
 エッチング工程で用いるエッチングガスの種類は特に制限されないが、ドライエッチング法により除去される着色層部分(被エッチング部分)を矩形に加工可能であるという観点から、フッ素系ガスの少なくとも1種を少なくとも含んでいることが好ましい。
 フッ素系ガスとしては公知のフッ素系ガスを使用できるが、下記式(I)で表わされるフッ素系化合物のガスであることが好ましい。
   CnHmFl    式(I)
 式中、nは1~6を表し、mは0~13を表し、lは1~14を表す。
 式(I)で表されるフッ素系ガスとしては、例えば、CF4、C26、C38、C24、C48、C46、C58、及び、CHF3からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を挙げることができる。フッ素系ガスは、上記群の中から2種以上のガスを組合せて用いることも可能である。
The type of etching gas used in the etching process is not particularly limited, but at least one fluorine-based gas is included from the viewpoint that the colored layer portion (the portion to be etched) removed by the dry etching method can be processed into a rectangle. It is preferable that
A known fluorine-based gas can be used as the fluorine-based gas, but a fluorine-based compound gas represented by the following formula (I) is preferable.
CnHmFl Formula (I)
In the formula, n represents 1 to 6, m represents 0 to 13, and l represents 1 to 14.
Examples of the fluorine-based gas represented by the formula (I) include CF 4 , C 2 F 6 , C 3 F 8 , C 2 F 4 , C 4 F 8 , C 4 F 6 , C 5 F 8 , and And at least one selected from the group consisting of CHF 3 . The fluorine-based gas can be used in combination of two or more gases from the above group.
 更に、フッ素系ガスとしては、被エッチング部分の矩形性維持の観点から、CF4、C26、C48、及びCHF3からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、CF4及び/又はC26であることがより好ましく、CF4であることが特に好ましい。 Further, the fluorine-based gas is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of CF 4 , C 2 F 6 , C 4 F 8 , and CHF 3 from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion. CF 4 and / or C 2 F 6 are more preferable, and CF 4 is particularly preferable.
 エッチングガスは、酸素ガスを混合することがさらに好ましい。この混合ガス中でのフッ素系ガスと酸素ガスとの含有比率(フッ素系ガス/酸素ガス)は、流量比で2/1~8/1とすることが好ましい。この範囲内とすることにより、エッチング処理時におけるレジストパターン24側壁へのエッチング生成物の付着を防止でき、後述するレジストパターン除去工程において、レジストパターン24の剥離が容易になる。中でも特に、被エッチング部分の矩形性を維持しながらエッチング生成物のレジストパターン24側壁への再付着の防止の点で、フッ素系ガスと酸素ガスとの含有比率が2/1~6/1であることが好ましく、3/1~5/1であることが特に好ましい。 More preferably, the etching gas is mixed with oxygen gas. The content ratio (fluorine-based gas / oxygen gas) between the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas in the mixed gas is preferably 2/1 to 8/1 in terms of a flow rate ratio. By setting it within this range, it is possible to prevent the etching product from adhering to the side wall of the resist pattern 24 during the etching process, and the resist pattern 24 can be easily peeled off in the resist pattern removing step described later. In particular, the content ratio of the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas is 2/1 to 6/1 in terms of preventing the redeposition of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24 while maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion. It is preferable that the ratio is 3/1 to 5/1.
 また、混合ガスは、エッチングプラズマの分圧コントロール安定性、及び被エッチング形状の垂直性を維持する観点から、フッ素系ガス及び酸素ガスに加え、他のガスとしてさらに、ヘリウム(He)、ネオン(Ne)、アルゴン(Ar)、クリプトン(Kr)、キセノン(Xe)などの希ガス、塩素原子、フッ素原子、臭素原子等のハロゲン原子を含むハロゲン系ガス(例えば、CCl4、CClF3、AlF3、AlCl3等)、N2、CO、及びCO2からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、Ar、He、Kr、N2、及びXeからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましく、He、Ar、及びXeのからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが更に好ましい。
 但し、エッチングプラズマの分圧コントロール安定性、及び被エッチング形状の垂直性を維持することが可能である場合は、混合ガスが、フッ素系ガス及び酸素ガスのみからなっていてもよい。
 混合ガスにおいて、フッ素系ガス及び酸素ガスに加えて含んでいてもよい他のガスの含有量は、酸素ガスを1としたときの流量比で25以下であることが好ましく、10以上20以下であることがより好ましく、14以上18以下であることが特に好ましい。
In addition to the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas, the mixed gas is further mixed with helium (He), neon (from the viewpoint of maintaining the etching plasma partial pressure control stability and the verticality of the shape to be etched. Ne), argon (Ar), krypton (Kr), xenon (Xe) and other rare gases, and halogen gases containing halogen atoms such as chlorine atoms, fluorine atoms, bromine atoms (eg, CCl 4 , CClF 3 , AlF 3 , AlCl 3, etc.), N 2, CO, and preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of CO 2, Ar, He, Kr , at least one selected from the group consisting of N 2, and Xe More preferably, it includes a species, and more preferably includes at least one selected from the group consisting of He, Ar, and Xe.
However, when it is possible to maintain the partial pressure control stability of the etching plasma and the perpendicularity of the shape to be etched, the mixed gas may consist only of a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas.
In the mixed gas, the content of other gases that may be contained in addition to the fluorine-based gas and the oxygen gas is preferably 25 or less in terms of a flow rate ratio when the oxygen gas is 1, and is 10 or more and 20 or less. More preferably, it is 14 or more and 18 or less.
 硬化膜20へのダメージをなるべく抑制するため、ドライエッチング処理の開始から、下記の所定の処理時間経過後にドライエッチング処理を終了することが好ましい。
 ドライエッチング処理時間の算出方法は、エッチング工程におけるエッチングレート(nm/min.)を算出し、算出したエッチングレートより、エッチングに要する処理時間を算出する。エッチングレートは、例えば、エッチング時間と残膜の関係を採取することによって算出することができる。
 エッチング処理時間としては、10分以内でエッチング処理を行うことが好ましく、7分以内で処理することがより好ましい。
 エッチング工程におけるチャンバーの内部圧力は、2.0~6.0Paであることが好ましく、4.0~5.0Paであることより好ましく、チャンバーの内部圧力が上記範囲であることによりパターンの矩形性が良好になり、エッチングで生成される側壁保護膜のフォトレジストへの付着を抑制することができる。チャンバーの内部圧力は、例えば、エッチングガスの流量とチャンバーの減圧度を適宜制御することによって調整することができる。
In order to suppress damage to the cured film 20 as much as possible, it is preferable to end the dry etching process after the elapse of the following predetermined processing time from the start of the dry etching process.
The dry etching processing time calculation method calculates the etching rate (nm / min.) In the etching process, and calculates the processing time required for etching from the calculated etching rate. The etching rate can be calculated, for example, by collecting the relationship between the etching time and the remaining film.
The etching time is preferably 10 minutes or less, and more preferably 7 minutes or less.
The internal pressure of the chamber in the etching process is preferably 2.0 to 6.0 Pa, more preferably 4.0 to 5.0 Pa, and the pattern has a rectangular shape due to the internal pressure of the chamber being in the above range. And the adhesion of the sidewall protective film produced by etching to the photoresist can be suppressed. The internal pressure of the chamber can be adjusted, for example, by appropriately controlling the flow rate of the etching gas and the degree of decompression of the chamber.
 また、エッチング工程では、基板1aの温度が30℃以上100℃以下であることが好ましい。これにより、エッチング処理時におけるレジストパターン24側壁へのエッチング生成物の付着をより抑制することができ、後述するレジストパターン除去工程におけるレジストパターン24の剥離をより容易にすることができる。なかでも、被エッチング部分の矩形性維持と、エッチング生成物のレジストパターン24側壁への再付着抑制の観点から、30℃~80℃であることがより好ましく、40℃~60℃であることが特に好ましい。
 エッチング工程においては、例えば、ウエハステージの温度を30℃以上100℃以下に制御することで、基板1aの温度を30℃以上100℃以下とすることができる。
In the etching step, the temperature of the substrate 1a is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 100 ° C. or lower. Thereby, adhesion of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24 during the etching process can be further suppressed, and peeling of the resist pattern 24 in the resist pattern removing process described later can be facilitated. In particular, the temperature is preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., and preferably 40 ° C. to 60 ° C. from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion and suppressing the reattachment of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24. Particularly preferred.
In the etching step, for example, the temperature of the substrate 1a can be set to 30 ° C. or more and 100 ° C. or less by controlling the temperature of the wafer stage to 30 ° C. or more and 100 ° C. or less.
 エッチング工程におけるドライエッチングの条件は着色層21の材質や層厚等によって異なるが、上記条件の以外の好ましい条件について以下説明する。
 混合ガスのガス流量としては、1500mL/min(0℃、1013hPa)以下が好ましく500~1000mL/min(0℃、1013hPa)がより好ましい。
 高周波としては、400kHz、60MHz、13.56MHz、2.45GHz等から選択可能であり、50~2000W好ましくは100~1000WのRFパワーで処理できる。
 ソースパワー(RF)とバイアスの関係としては、RFパワー/アンテナバイアス/基板バイアス(ウエハバイアス)がそれぞれ、600~1000W/300~500W/150~250Wであることが好ましく、より好ましくは700~900W/350~450/200Wである。
The dry etching conditions in the etching process vary depending on the material, layer thickness, and the like of the colored layer 21, but preferable conditions other than the above conditions will be described below.
The gas flow rate of the mixed gas is preferably 1500 mL / min (0 ° C., 1013 hPa) or less, and more preferably 500 to 1000 mL / min (0 ° C., 1013 hPa).
The high frequency can be selected from 400 kHz, 60 MHz, 13.56 MHz, 2.45 GHz, and the like, and can be processed with an RF power of 50 to 2000 W, preferably 100 to 1000 W.
Regarding the relationship between source power (RF) and bias, RF power / antenna bias / substrate bias (wafer bias) is preferably 600 to 1000 W / 300 to 500 W / 150 to 250 W, and more preferably 700 to 900 W, respectively. / 350 to 450 / 200W.
 また、上述したように、エッチング工程としては、フッ素系ガスを含むエッチングガスを用いて着色層の一部または全部をエッチングする工程が好ましいが、上記のエッチング工程は、エッチング条件の異なる2段階以上のエッチング工程を有していてもよい。例えば、異なるエッチングガスを用いたエッチング工程を有していてもよい。より具体的には、フッ素ガスを含むエッチングガスを用いて着色層のエッチング(第1のエッチング工程)を行い、金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜が完全に露出する前でエッチングを止めて、さらに異なるガス(例えば、窒素ガスと酸素ガスとを含む混合ガス)による第2のエッチングを実施してもよい。
 以下では、第2のエッチングで使用されるガスが、窒素ガスと酸素ガスとを含む混合ガスの場合について詳述する。
In addition, as described above, the etching process is preferably a process in which part or all of the colored layer is etched using an etching gas containing a fluorine-based gas. However, the etching process includes two or more stages with different etching conditions. The etching process may be included. For example, you may have the etching process using different etching gas. More specifically, the colored layer is etched using an etching gas containing fluorine gas (first etching step), and the etching is stopped before the cured film containing the metal oxide particles is completely exposed. Further, the second etching may be performed using a different gas (for example, a mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas).
Hereinafter, the case where the gas used in the second etching is a mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas will be described in detail.
 従来、着色層21をパターン様に除去するエッチング工程において、第1の混合ガスのみを用いて硬化膜20の下に位置する平坦化層10等により形成される支持体となる基板1aが露出するまでエッチング処理を行うと、支持体ダメージが発生してしまう傾向にある。また、発生する支持体ダメージは、特にオーバーエッチング処理を実施する場合に顕著であった。これに対して、第1のエッチング工程で用いる第1の混合ガスとは異なる、窒素ガスと酸素ガスとを含む第2の混合ガスを用いて第2のエッチング工程を行うことで支持体ダメージの発生が抑制されたエッチング加工が可能になる。
 また、窒素ガスと酸素ガスとを含む第2の混合ガスを使用する第2のエッチング工程を行うことで、第1のエッチング工程の際にレジストパターン24の表層に形成されたプラズマに起因する変質層を除去することができる。これにより、後のレジストパターン除去工程において、剥離液や溶剤によるレジストパターン24の剥離をより容易に行うことができる。
Conventionally, in an etching process for removing the colored layer 21 in a pattern, the substrate 1a serving as a support formed by the planarizing layer 10 and the like located under the cured film 20 is exposed using only the first mixed gas. When the etching process is performed until the substrate is damaged, the support tends to be damaged. Further, the generated support damage was particularly noticeable when an over-etching process was performed. On the other hand, the support damage is reduced by performing the second etching step using a second mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, which is different from the first mixed gas used in the first etching step. Etching with suppressed generation is possible.
Further, by performing the second etching process using the second mixed gas containing nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, the alteration caused by the plasma formed on the surface layer of the resist pattern 24 during the first etching process. The layer can be removed. Thereby, in the subsequent resist pattern removing step, the resist pattern 24 can be easily peeled off by the stripping solution or the solvent.
 更に、基板1aの平坦化層10上に形成された硬化膜20は、第2の混合ガスに対してエッチングレートが低いため、僅かにエッチングされるだけであって、硬化膜20下の支持体へのダメージが抑制される。
 第2のエッチング工程で使用される第2の混合ガスは、窒素ガスと酸素ガスと含むが、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲でフッ素系ガスを含んでいてもよい。フッ素系ガスの含有比率(フッ素系ガス/酸素ガス)が流量比で5%以下であることが好ましく、フッ素系ガスを含まないことが特に好ましい。フッ素系ガスの含有量が上記範囲であることで支持体のダメージをより効果的に抑制することができる。
Furthermore, since the cured film 20 formed on the planarization layer 10 of the substrate 1a has a low etching rate with respect to the second mixed gas, the cured film 20 is only slightly etched. Damage to the is suppressed.
The second mixed gas used in the second etching step includes nitrogen gas and oxygen gas, but may contain a fluorine-based gas as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. The content ratio of the fluorine-based gas (fluorine-based gas / oxygen gas) is preferably 5% or less in terms of flow rate ratio, and particularly preferably does not contain the fluorine-based gas. When the content of the fluorine-based gas is within the above range, damage to the support can be more effectively suppressed.
 第2の混合ガスにおける窒素ガスと酸素ガスの含有比率(窒素ガス/酸素ガス)としては、流量比で10/1~3/1とすることが好ましい。上記範囲内とすることにより、エッチング処理時におけるレジストパターン24側壁へのエッチング生成物の付着をより効果的に抑制することができ、後述するレジストパターン除去工程における、レジストパターン24の剥離をより容易にすることができる。上記含有比率は、被エッチング部分の矩形性維持と、エッチング生成物のレジストパターン24側壁への再付着防止の観点から、20/1~3/1が好ましい範囲であり、15/1~4/1であることがより好ましく、10/1~5/1であることが特に好ましい。
 第2の混合ガスは、エッチングプラズマの分圧コントロール安定性、及び被エッチング形状の垂直性を維持する観点から、窒素ガス及び酸素ガスに加え、他のガスとしてさらに、ヘリウム(He)、ネオン(Ne)、アルゴン(Ar)、クリプトン(Kr)、及びキセノン(Xe)からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種のガスを含んでいることが好ましく、He、Ar、及びXeからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種のガスを含んでいることがより好ましい。
The content ratio of nitrogen gas to oxygen gas (nitrogen gas / oxygen gas) in the second mixed gas is preferably 10/1 to 3/1 in terms of a flow rate ratio. By making it within the above range, the adhesion of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24 during the etching process can be more effectively suppressed, and the resist pattern 24 can be more easily removed in the resist pattern removing step described later. Can be. The content ratio is preferably in the range of 20/1 to 3/1 from the viewpoint of maintaining the rectangularity of the etched portion and preventing the redeposition of the etching product to the side wall of the resist pattern 24, and 15/1 to 4 / 1 is more preferable, and 10/1 to 5/1 is particularly preferable.
From the viewpoint of maintaining the partial pressure control stability of the etching plasma and the verticality of the shape to be etched, the second mixed gas is further made of helium (He), neon ( Ne), argon (Ar), krypton (Kr), and xenon (Xe) are preferably included. The gas is preferably selected from the group consisting of He, Ar, and Xe. More preferably, it contains at least one kind of gas.
 但し、エッチングプラズマの分圧コントロール安定性、及び被エッチング形状の垂直性を維持することが可能である場合は、上記第2の混合ガスが、窒素ガス及び酸素ガスのみからなることができる。
 第2の混合ガスにおいて、窒素ガス及び酸素ガスに加えて、更に含有してもよい他のガスの含有量は、酸素ガスを1としたときの流量比で25以下であることが好ましく、5以上20以下であることが好ましく、8以上12以下であることが特に好ましい。
However, when it is possible to maintain the partial pressure control stability of the etching plasma and the perpendicularity of the shape to be etched, the second mixed gas can be composed of only nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
In the second mixed gas, in addition to the nitrogen gas and the oxygen gas, the content of other gases that may be further contained is preferably 25 or less in terms of a flow rate ratio when the oxygen gas is 1. It is preferably 20 or more and particularly preferably 8 or more and 12 or less.
 第2のエッチング工程においては、例えば、第1のエッチング工程で残存した着色層21を除去するドライエッチング処理の開始から、第1のエッチング工程と同様に算出される処理時間の経過後にドライエッチング処理を終了することができる。また、エンドポイント検出によって残存する着色層21を除去するドライエッチング処理時間を管理してもよい。第2のエッチング工程においては、エンドポイント検出で着色層21を除去するドライエッチング処理時間を管理することが好ましい。
 エッチング処理時間としては10分以内であることが好ましく、7分以内で処理することがより好ましい。
In the second etching process, for example, the dry etching process is performed after the processing time calculated in the same manner as in the first etching process from the start of the dry etching process for removing the colored layer 21 remaining in the first etching process. Can be terminated. Further, the dry etching processing time for removing the remaining colored layer 21 by endpoint detection may be managed. In the second etching step, it is preferable to manage the dry etching processing time for removing the colored layer 21 by endpoint detection.
The etching processing time is preferably within 10 minutes, more preferably within 7 minutes.
 第2のエッチング工程が、チャンバーの内部圧力が1.0~5.0Paであることが好ましく、2.0~4.0Paであることがより好ましい。
 上記混合ガスの混合比率、及びチャンバーの内部圧力を満たす条件において、パターンの矩形性を損なうことなく、支持体ダメージの発生が抑制されたパターンをより効率よく形成することができる。
 第2のエッチング工程におけるソースパワー(RF)とバイアスの関係としては、RFパワー/アンテナバイアス/基板バイアスがそれぞれ、400~800W/50~200W/100~300Wであることが好ましく、より好ましくは500~700W/100~150W/200~300Wである。
 第2のエッチング処理工程における、エッチング処理時の支持体温度及びその他の条件については、第1のエッチング処理工程おいて説明した事項を好適に適用することができる。
In the second etching step, the internal pressure of the chamber is preferably 1.0 to 5.0 Pa, and more preferably 2.0 to 4.0 Pa.
A pattern in which the occurrence of damage to the support is suppressed can be more efficiently formed without impairing the rectangularity of the pattern under conditions that satisfy the mixing ratio of the mixed gas and the internal pressure of the chamber.
Regarding the relationship between the source power (RF) and the bias in the second etching step, RF power / antenna bias / substrate bias is preferably 400 to 800 W / 50 to 200 W / 100 to 300 W, more preferably 500, respectively. 700W / 100 to 150W / 200 to 300W.
Regarding the support temperature and other conditions during the etching process in the second etching process, the matters described in the first etching process can be suitably applied.
 第2のエッチング工程は、オーバーエッチング処理工程を更に含むことが好ましい。第2の混合ガスを用いたドライエッチングにより着色層21を除去し、硬化膜露出部26を形成した後に、更に第2の混合ガスを用いてオーバーエッチング処理することで、残存するエッチング残渣を、パターンの矩形性を維持したまま効率よく除去することができ、且つ支持体ダメージの発生をより効果的に抑制することができる。
 オーバーエッチング処理は、オーバーエッチング時間を設定して行うことが好ましい。オーバーエッチング時間は任意に設定できるが、レジストパターン24のエッチング耐性と被エッチングパターンの矩形性維持の点で、第1のエッチング工程におけるエッチング処理時間(t1)と、第2のエッチング工程におけるエッチング処理時間(t2)との合計処理時間(t1+t2)の、30%以下であることが好ましく、5~25%であることがより好ましく、15~20%であることが特に好ましい。
It is preferable that the second etching step further includes an overetching treatment step. After the colored layer 21 is removed by dry etching using the second mixed gas and the cured film exposed portion 26 is formed, the remaining etching residue is further removed by over-etching using the second mixed gas. It can be efficiently removed while maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern, and the occurrence of support damage can be more effectively suppressed.
The overetching treatment is preferably performed by setting an overetching time. Although the over-etching time can be set arbitrarily, the etching process time (t1) in the first etching process and the etching process in the second etching process in terms of the etching resistance of the resist pattern 24 and the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. The total processing time (t1 + t2) with the time (t2) is preferably 30% or less, more preferably 5 to 25%, and particularly preferably 15 to 20%.
<レジストパターン除去工程>
 レジストパターン除去工程は、上記エッチング工程後に残存するレジストパターンを除去する工程である。
 より具体的には、図2(g)に示すように、エッチング処理終了後に、マスクのレジストパターン24を専用の剥離液や溶剤によって除去可能な状態にし、洗浄水を用いて除去する。
 なお、本発明においては、金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化層を適用していることにより、レジストパターン24剥離時にカラーフィルタ(パターン化された着色層)の剥がれを十分抑制してレジストパターン24を除去することができる。
<Resist pattern removal process>
The resist pattern removing step is a step of removing the resist pattern remaining after the etching step.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 2G, after the etching process is completed, the resist pattern 24 of the mask is made removable with a special stripping solution or solvent and removed using cleaning water.
In addition, in this invention, by applying the hardened layer containing metal oxide particles, peeling of the color filter (patterned colored layer) is sufficiently suppressed when the resist pattern 24 is peeled off, so that the resist pattern 24 is formed. Can be removed.
 レジストパターン24上に、剥離液又は溶剤を付与して、除去可能な状態にするには、例えば、剥離液又は溶剤を、少なくともレジストパターン24上に付与し、所定の時間停滞させるパドル現像工程を挙げることができる。剥離液又は溶剤を停滞させる時間としては、特に制限はないが、数十秒から数分であることが好ましい。
 洗浄水を用いてレジストパターン24を除去するには、例えば、スプレー式又はシャワー式の噴射ノズルから、レジストパターン24に洗浄水を噴射して、レジストパターン24を除去する。洗浄水としては、純水を好ましく用いることができる。
In order to apply a stripping solution or a solvent on the resist pattern 24 so that the resist pattern 24 can be removed, for example, a paddle development process in which a stripping solution or a solvent is applied on at least the resist pattern 24 and is held for a predetermined time. Can be mentioned. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant, It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
In order to remove the resist pattern 24 using cleaning water, the resist pattern 24 is removed by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 24 from, for example, a spray-type or shower-type spray nozzle. As the washing water, pure water can be preferably used.
 噴射ノズルとしては、その噴射範囲内に支持体全体が包含される噴射ノズルや、可動式の噴射ノズルであってその可動範囲が支持体全体を包含する噴射ノズルを挙げることができる。噴射ノズルが可動式の場合、レジストパターン24を除去する工程中に基板1a中心部から基板1a端部までを2回以上移動して洗浄水を噴射することで、より効果的にレジストパターン24を除去することができる。 Examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support body is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support body. When the spray nozzle is movable, during the process of removing the resist pattern 24, the resist pattern 24 is more effectively moved by spraying cleaning water by moving from the center of the substrate 1a to the end of the substrate 1a at least twice. Can be removed.
 剥離液は一般的には有機溶剤を含有するが、無機溶媒を更に含有してもよい。有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭化水素系化合物、ハロゲン化炭化水素系化合物、アルコール系化合物、エーテル又はアセタール系化合物、ケトン又はアルデヒド系化合物、エステル系化合物、多価アルコール系化合物、カルボン酸又はその酸無水物系化合物、フェノール系化合物、含窒素化合物、含硫黄化合物、又は含フッ素化合物が挙げられる。
 剥離液としては、含窒素化合物を含有することが好ましく、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことがより好ましい。
 非環状含窒素化合物としては、水酸基を有する非環状含窒素化合物であることが好ましい。具体的には例えば、モノイソプロパノールアミン、ジイソプロパノールアミン、トリイソプロパノールアミン、N-エチルエタノールアミン、N,N-ジブチルエタノールアミン、N-ブチルエタノールアミン、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンなどが挙げられ、好ましくはモノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンであり、より好ましくはモノエタノールアミン(H2NCH2CH2OH)である。
 環状含窒素化合物としては、イソキノリン、イミダゾール、N-エチルモルホリン、ε-カプロラクタム、キノリン、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、α-ピコリン、β-ピコリン、γ-ピコリン、2-ピペコリン、3-ピペコリン、4-ピペコリン、ピペラジン、ピペリジン、ピラジン、ピリジン、ピロリジン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-フェニルモルホリン、2,4-ルチジン、2,6-ルチジンなどが挙げられ、好ましくは、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチルモルホリンであり、より好ましくはN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)である。
The stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent. Examples of the organic solvent include hydrocarbon compounds, halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, alcohol compounds, ether or acetal compounds, ketones or aldehyde compounds, ester compounds, polyhydric alcohol compounds, carboxylic acids or acids thereof. Examples thereof include an anhydride compound, a phenol compound, a nitrogen-containing compound, a sulfur-containing compound, and a fluorine-containing compound.
The stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
The acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group. Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine and the like. Preferably, they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH).
Cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ε-caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, α-picoline, β-picoline, γ-picoline, 2-pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, 2,6-lutidine and the like are preferable, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine are preferred, and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) is more preferred.
 剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことが好ましいが、なかでも、非環状含窒素化合物として、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン及びトリエタノールアミンから選ばれる少なくとも1種と、環状含窒素化合物として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン及びN-エチルモルホリンから選ばれる少なくとも1種とを含むことがより好ましく、モノエタノールアミンとN-メチル-2-ピロリドンとを含むことが更に好ましい。
 非環状含窒素化合物の含有量としては、剥離液100質量部に対して、9質量部以上11質量部以下であって、環状含窒素化合物の含有量が65質量部以上70質量部以下であることが望ましい。
 また、剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物の混合物を純水で希釈したものであることが好ましい。
The stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound. Among them, as the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound, at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanolamine, and cyclic The nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
The content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by mass to 11 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 65 parts by mass to 70 parts by mass. It is desirable.
Moreover, it is preferable that stripping solution is what diluted the mixture of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound and the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
 レジストパターン24剥離後は、硬化膜露出部26に既に形成された着色層とは異なる着色層を形成することにより2色のカラーフィルタが製造され、更に2色のカラーフィルタ上に再びフォトレジスト層形成工程を形成し、同様にパターン形成工程、エッチング工程、及びレジストパターン除去工程を繰り返せば多色のカラーフィルタが形成される。 After the resist pattern 24 is peeled off, a two-color filter is manufactured by forming a colored layer different from the colored layer already formed on the cured film exposed portion 26, and the photoresist layer is again formed on the two-color filter. If a formation process is formed and the pattern formation process, the etching process, and the resist pattern removal process are similarly repeated, a multicolored color filter is formed.
 以上説明したように、本発明に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法によれば、支持体の上に一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜を形成し、エッチング工程でエッチングガスを用いてドライエッチング処理を行って着色層をエッチングしてパターン状の着色層を形成することにより、レジストパターン剥離時に着色層のパターン剥がれを抑制することが可能となり、非常に有用である。
 本発明の製造方法で作製したカラーフィルタは、液晶表示素子やCCD等の固体撮像素子に用いることができ、特に100万画素を超えるような高解像度のCCD素子やCMOS等に好適である。本発明のカラーフィルタは、例えば、CCDを構成する各画素の受光部と集光するためのマイクロレンズとの間に配置されるカラーフィルタとして用いることが可能となる。
As described above, according to the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm is formed on a support, and an etching gas is used in the etching step. By performing a dry etching process using, and etching the colored layer to form a patterned colored layer, it is possible to suppress the pattern peeling of the colored layer during the resist pattern peeling, which is very useful.
The color filter produced by the production method of the present invention can be used for a solid-state imaging device such as a liquid crystal display device or a CCD, and is particularly suitable for a high-resolution CCD device or a CMOS having more than 1 million pixels. The color filter of the present invention can be used as, for example, a color filter disposed between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD and a microlens for condensing light.
 以下、本発明を実施例により具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらの実施例に限定されるものではない。
 なお、以下の各工程において、市販の処理液を用いた処理を行う場合、特記しない限りメーカー指定の方法に従って各処理を行った。
 また、後述する実施例中の「部」は、「質量部」を意図する。
EXAMPLES The present invention will be specifically described below with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited to these examples.
In addition, in the following each process, when performing the process using a commercially available process liquid, unless otherwise indicated, each process was performed according to the method of a manufacturer specification.
In addition, “parts” in examples described later are intended to be “parts by mass”.
<実施例1>
[金属酸化物微粒子分散液(分散組成物)の調製]
 下記組成の混合液に対し、循環型分散装置(ビーズミル)として、寿工業株式会社製ウルトラアペックスミルを用いて、以下のようにして分散処理を行い、分散組成物として二酸化チタン分散液を得た。
~組成~
・二酸化チタン(石原産業(株)製 TTO-51(C))
結晶形:ルチル、TiO%:79~85%、Al及びステアリン酸で表面処理、比表面積50~60m/g、一次粒子径10~30nm、吸油量24~30g/100g
                                :181.8部
・分散剤(高分子分散剤(B))B-1(30質量%溶液)     :133.3部
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA):284.9部
<Example 1>
[Preparation of metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition)]
For a mixed liquid having the following composition, as a circulation type dispersion apparatus (bead mill), an ultra-apex mill manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo Co., Ltd. was used for dispersion treatment as follows to obtain a titanium dioxide dispersion as a dispersion composition. .
~ Composition ~
・ Titanium dioxide (Ishihara Sangyo Co., Ltd. TTO-51 (C))
Crystal form: Rutile, TiO 2 %: 79-85%, surface treatment with Al 2 O 3 and stearic acid, specific surface area 50-60 m 2 / g, primary particle size 10-30 nm, oil absorption 24-30 g / 100 g
: 181.8 parts-Dispersant (polymer dispersant (B)) B-1 (30 mass% solution): 133.3 parts-Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA): 284.9 parts
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
 なお、上記分散剤(B-1)は、特開2007-277514号公報の段落[0266]~[0348]に記載の合成方法に準じて、合成した。具体的には以下の通りである。
 ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)〔(33);堺化学工業(株)製〕100部、及び下記の、吸着部位を有し、かつ炭素-炭素二重結合を有する化合物(A-3)91.38部を、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール446.6部に溶解させ、窒素気流下、90℃に加熱した。これに、ジメチル2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕0.81部を加えて2時間加熱した。更に、V-601を0.81部加え、窒素気流下、90℃で2時間反応させた。室温まで冷却することで、メルカプタン化合物の30質量%溶液を得た。
The dispersant (B-1) was synthesized according to the synthesis method described in paragraphs [0266] to [0348] of JP-A-2007-277514. Specifically, it is as follows.
100 parts of dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate) [(33); manufactured by Sakai Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.] and the following compound having an adsorption site and having a carbon-carbon double bond ( A-3) 91.38 parts were dissolved in 446.6 parts of 1-methoxy-2-propanol and heated to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. To this, 0.81 part of dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] was added and heated for 2 hours. Further, 0.81 part of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. By cooling to room temperature, a 30% by mass solution of a mercaptan compound was obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
 上記メルカプタン化合物の30質量%溶液499.57部、及びメタクリル酸メチル(M-1)100.13部の混合溶液を、窒素気流下、90℃に加熱した。これに、ジメチル2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)〔V-601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕0.681部をプロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート72.73部に溶解した液を2時間かけて滴下し、続いて90℃で2時間加熱した。更にV-601を0.230部加え、窒素気流下、90℃で2時間反応させ、再びV-601を0.230部加え、窒素気流下、90℃で2時間反応させた。その後、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート160.9部を加え、室温まで冷却することにより、上記に示す分散剤(高分子分散剤(B))B-1(B-1:ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量3300、酸価241mgKOH/g)の30質量%溶液を得た。 A mixed solution of 499.57 parts of a 30% by mass solution of the mercaptan compound and 100.13 parts of methyl methacrylate (M-1) was heated to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen stream. To this, 0.681 parts of dimethyl 2,2′-azobis (2-methylpropionate) [V-601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] was added 72.73 parts of propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate. The solution dissolved in was added dropwise over 2 hours, followed by heating at 90 ° C. for 2 hours. Further, 0.230 parts of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. Again, 0.230 parts of V-601 was added and reacted at 90 ° C. for 2 hours under a nitrogen stream. Thereafter, 160.9 parts of propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate was added and cooled to room temperature, whereby the dispersant (polymer dispersant (B)) B-1 (B-1: polystyrene equivalent) shown above was added. A 30 mass% solution having a weight average molecular weight of 3300 and an acid value of 241 mgKOH / g) was obtained.
 また、分散装置は以下の条件で運転した。
・ビーズ径:φ0.05mm
・ビーズ充填率:75体積%
・周速:10m/sec
・ポンプ供給量:10kg/時間
・冷却水:水道水
・ビーズミル環状通路内容積:0.15L
・分散処理する混合液量:0.44kg
Further, the dispersing apparatus was operated under the following conditions.
・ Bead diameter: φ0.05mm
・ Bead filling rate: 75% by volume
・ Peripheral speed: 10m / sec
・ Pump supply amount: 10 kg / hour ・ Cooling water: Tap water ・ Bead mill annular passage volume: 0.15 L
・ Amount of liquid mixture to be dispersed: 0.44 kg
 分散開始後、30分間隔(1パスの時間)で平均粒子径の測定を行った。
 平均粒子径は分散時間(パス回数)と共に減少していったが、次第にその変化量が少なくなっていった。分散時間を30分間延長したときの一次粒子径の変化が5nm以下となった時点で分散を終了した。なお、この分散液中の二酸化チタン粒子の一次粒子径は40nmであった。
 なお、二酸化チタンの一次粒子径は、二酸化チタンを含む混合液又は分散液を、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートで80倍に希釈し、得られた希釈液について動的光散乱法を用いて測定することにより得られる。この測定は、日機装株式会社製マイクロトラックUPA-EX150を用いて行って得られた数平均粒子径のこととする。
After the start of dispersion, the average particle size was measured at 30 minute intervals (one pass time).
The average particle diameter decreased with the dispersion time (pass number), but the amount of change gradually decreased. Dispersion was terminated when the change in the primary particle size when the dispersion time was extended by 30 minutes became 5 nm or less. The primary particle diameter of the titanium dioxide particles in this dispersion was 40 nm.
The primary particle diameter of titanium dioxide is measured by diluting a mixed liquid or dispersion containing titanium dioxide 80 times with propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and using the dynamic light scattering method for the obtained diluted liquid. Is obtained. This measurement is the number average particle diameter obtained by using Microtrack UPA-EX150 manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.
[硬化膜形成用組成物の調製]
 上記で得られた金属酸化物微粒子分散液(分散組成物)を用いて、以下の組成となるように各成分を混合して硬化膜形成用組成物を得た。
 ~硬化膜形成用組成物の組成~
・上記で調製した二酸化チタン分散液(分散組成物)      …  82.00部
・重合性化合物:JER-157S65(三菱化学(株)製)(重合性化合物(C))…3.70部
・バインダーポリマーM-1(バインダーポリマー(I))    …   0.44部
(下記M-1;重量平均分子量(Mw)及び共重合比(重量比)は下記の通りである)
・界面活性剤 メガファックF-781(界面活性剤(J))   …   0.03部
・p-メトキシフェノール(重合禁止剤(H))         …   0.01部
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート     …  13.82部
[Preparation of composition for forming cured film]
Using the metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition) obtained above, each component was mixed so as to obtain the following composition to obtain a composition for forming a cured film.
-Composition of cured film forming composition-
-Titanium dioxide dispersion prepared above (dispersion composition) 82.00 parts-Polymerizable compound: JER-157S65 (Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation) (polymerizable compound (C)) ... 3.70 parts-Binder Polymer M-1 (binder polymer (I)) 0.44 parts (M-1 below; weight average molecular weight (Mw) and copolymerization ratio (weight ratio) are as follows)
・ Surfactant Megafac F-781 (surfactant (J)) 0.03 part p-methoxyphenol (polymerization inhibitor (H)) 0.01 part propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 13.82 Part
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
 硬化膜形成工程として、上記硬化膜形成用組成物をシリコンウェーハ上にスピンコーター(東京エレクトロン製、ACT-8)にて塗布した。ホットプレートを使用して230℃で10分間の加熱を行い、膜厚が0.4μmの硬化膜を形成した。なお、硬化膜中には、一次粒子径が40nmの二酸化チタンが含有される。
 着色層形成工程としては、硬化膜上に顔料含有熱硬化性組成物(着色熱硬化性組成物)(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ社製SG-5000L)をスピンコーター(東京エレクトロン製、ACT-8)にて、膜厚が0.8μmの塗布膜となるように塗布した。ホットプレートを使用して、220℃で5分間の加熱を行い、塗布膜を硬化させて着色層21を形成した。顔料含有熱硬化性組成物(着色熱硬化性組成物)により形成された着色層の膜厚は0.6μmであった。
In the cured film forming step, the composition for forming a cured film was applied onto a silicon wafer by a spin coater (manufactured by Tokyo Electron, ACT-8). Heating was performed at 230 ° C. for 10 minutes using a hot plate to form a cured film having a thickness of 0.4 μm. The cured film contains titanium dioxide having a primary particle size of 40 nm.
In the colored layer forming step, a pigment-containing thermosetting composition (colored thermosetting composition) (SG-5000L, manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) is applied onto the cured film as a spin coater (Tokyo Electron, ACT-8). The film was applied so that the film thickness was 0.8 μm. Using a hot plate, heating was performed at 220 ° C. for 5 minutes, and the coating film was cured to form the colored layer 21. The film thickness of the colored layer formed by the pigment-containing thermosetting composition (colored thermosetting composition) was 0.6 μm.
 フォトレジスト層形成工程としては、上記SG-5000L上に、ポジ型フォトレジスト「FHi622BC」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ社製)をスピンコーター(東京エレクトロン製、ACT-8)にて塗布し、100℃で2分間の加熱処理を行い、膜厚が0.8μmになるようにフォトレジスト層を形成した。
 パターン形成工程としては、REDのフィルタアレイに対応する領域を、i線ステッパー(キャノン(株)製、FPA3000i5+)にて350mJ/cm2のパターン露光を行い、110℃で1分間の加熱処理を実施した後、現像液「FHD-5」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ社製)で1分間の現像処理後、110℃で2分間のポストベーク処理を実施して、REDのフィルタアレイを形成すべき領域のフォトレジストを除去し、1.4μm×1.4μmサイズのアイランドパターン(レジストパターン)を形成した。
In the photoresist layer forming step, a positive photoresist “FHi622BC” (manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) is applied onto the SG-5000L using a spin coater (manufactured by Tokyo Electron, ACT-8) and 100 ° C. Then, a heat treatment for 2 minutes was performed to form a photoresist layer so that the film thickness was 0.8 μm.
In the pattern formation process, the area corresponding to the filter array of RED is subjected to pattern exposure of 350 mJ / cm 2 with an i-line stepper (manufactured by Canon, FPA3000i5 +), and heat treatment is performed at 110 ° C. for 1 minute. After that, after developing for 1 minute with the developer “FHD-5” (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials), post-baking for 2 minutes at 110 ° C. to form the RED filter array The photoresist was removed to form an island pattern (resist pattern) having a size of 1.4 μm × 1.4 μm.
 エッチング工程としては、ドライエッチング装置(日立ハイテクノロジーズ社製、U-621)にて、RFパワー:800W、アンテナバイアス:400W、ウエハバイアス:200W、チャンバーの内部圧力:4.0Pa、基板温度:50℃、混合ガスのガス種及び流量をCF4:200mL/min.、O2:50mL/min.、Ar:800mL/min.とし、111秒のエッチング処理を実施した。
 エッチング条件でのSG-5000Lのエッチングレートは326nm/minであって、着色層の削れ量は603nmであった。従って、エッチング工程において、SG-5000Lで形成された着色層がすべて除去された。
As an etching process, RF power: 800 W, antenna bias: 400 W, wafer bias: 200 W, chamber internal pressure: 4.0 Pa, substrate temperature: 50 with a dry etching apparatus (U-621, manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies Corporation) ° C, the gas type and flow rate of the mixed gas were CF 4 : 200 mL / min. , O 2 : 50 mL / min. , Ar: 800 mL / min. And an etching process for 111 seconds was performed.
The etching rate of SG-5000L under the etching conditions was 326 nm / min, and the shaving amount of the colored layer was 603 nm. Therefore, all the colored layers formed of SG-5000L were removed in the etching process.
 レジストパターン除去工程としては、フォトレジスト剥離液「MS-230C」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ社製)を使用して、120秒の剥離処理を実施して、レジストパターンの除去を行った。
 以上の手順に従い、カラーフィルターパターンを形成し、単色のカラーフィルタを作製した。
In the resist pattern removing step, a resist stripping process was performed for 120 seconds using a photoresist stripping solution “MS-230C” (manufactured by Fujifilm Electronics Materials) to remove the resist pattern.
According to the above procedure, a color filter pattern was formed, and a monochromatic color filter was produced.
(剥がれ評価)
 上記で作製したカラーフィルタについて、パターン剥がれの発生数を、Applied Materials technology社製の欠陥検査装置ComPLUS3にて検査し、欠陥部分を検出し、これら欠陥部位より剥がれによる欠陥数を抽出した。より具体的には、上記装置を用いて、上記で作製された100億個の1.4μm×1.4μmのピクセル状のカラーフィルタ(パターン化された着色層)のうち、剥がれが生じているカラーフィルタの数(剥がれ欠陥数)を測定し、下記の評価基準により評価した。実用上、A又はBである必要がある。
~評価基準~
 A:剥がれ欠陥数が0個以上10個以下
 B:剥がれ欠陥数が11個以上20個以下(実用上許容できる程度)
 C:剥がれ欠陥数が21個以上
(Peeling evaluation)
About the color filter produced above, the number of occurrences of pattern peeling was inspected with a defect inspection apparatus ComPLUS3 manufactured by Applied Materials technology, a defective portion was detected, and the number of defects due to peeling was extracted from these defective portions. More specifically, peeling occurs among the 10 billion 1.4 μm × 1.4 μm pixel color filters (patterned colored layers) produced above using the above apparatus. The number of color filters (the number of peeling defects) was measured and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. Practically, it must be A or B.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The number of peeling defects is 0 or more and 10 or less B: The number of peeling defects is 11 or more and 20 or less (practically acceptable)
C: The number of peeling defects is 21 or more
<実施例2~12、比較例1>
 以下の表1に示すように、使用する材料及び成分比を変更して、上記実施例1と同様の手順に従って、カラーフィルタを製造し、剥がれ評価を行った。
 また、表1に示す「二酸化チタン」の一次粒子径は40nmであり、「酸化ジルコニウム」の一次粒子径は20nmであった。
 また、比較例1では、硬化膜中に金属酸化物粒子が含まれていない。
 なお、表1に示す「B-2」は以下の化合物である。
<Examples 2 to 12, Comparative Example 1>
As shown in Table 1 below, the materials used and the component ratios were changed, and color filters were produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 above, and peeled off.
The primary particle diameter of “titanium dioxide” shown in Table 1 was 40 nm, and the primary particle diameter of “zirconium oxide” was 20 nm.
Moreover, in the comparative example 1, the metal oxide particle is not contained in the cured film.
“B-2” shown in Table 1 is the following compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 分散剤B-2は、以下の手順に従って、合成した。
 ポリエチレンイミン(SP-018、数平均分子量1,800、日本触媒製)10g及び、以下のポリエステル(i-1)100gを混合し、120℃で3時間加熱して、中間体を得た。その後、65℃まで放冷し、無水コハク酸2.3gを含有するプロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート(以下、PGMEAと称することがある)200gをゆっくり添加し2時間攪拌し、分散剤B-2を得た。
 中間体の酸価滴定を行ったところ、酸価が6.4mgKOH/gであることが確認できた。また、分散剤B-2のアミン価滴定、酸滴定を行ったところ、酸価が17.9mgKOH/g、アミン価が46.2mgKOH/gであった。すなわち、分散剤B-2の酸価と中間体の酸価の差より、(k)が、分散剤B-2のアミン価と反応前の樹脂の窒素原子数の差より(l1+l2)が、中間体の酸価より(m1+m2)のモル%が計算でき、k/(l1+l2)/(m1+m2)/n=10/50/5/35であった。
 また、GPC法による重量平均分子量は15,000であった。
Dispersant B-2 was synthesized according to the following procedure.
10 g of polyethyleneimine (SP-018, number average molecular weight 1,800, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai) and 100 g of the following polyester (i-1) were mixed and heated at 120 ° C. for 3 hours to obtain an intermediate. Thereafter, the mixture is allowed to cool to 65 ° C., 200 g of propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate (hereinafter sometimes referred to as PGMEA) containing 2.3 g of succinic anhydride is slowly added, and the mixture is stirred for 2 hours. -2 was obtained.
When the acid value of the intermediate was titrated, it was confirmed that the acid value was 6.4 mgKOH / g. Further, when the amine value titration and acid titration of the dispersant B-2 were performed, the acid value was 17.9 mgKOH / g, and the amine value was 46.2 mgKOH / g. That is, (k) is based on the difference between the acid number of the dispersant B-2 and the acid number of the intermediate, and (l1 + l2) is based on the difference between the amine number of the dispersant B-2 and the number of nitrogen atoms in the resin before the reaction. The mol% of (m1 + m2) can be calculated from the acid value of the intermediate, and k / (l1 + l2) / (m1 + m2) / n = 10/50/5/35.
Moreover, the weight average molecular weight by GPC method was 15,000.
<比較例2>
 一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜のかわりに、ACCUGLASS(ラサ工業社製)を用いた以外は、上記実施例1と同様の手順に従って、カラーフィルタを製造し、剥がれ評価を行った。
 なお、比較例2は、上述した特許文献1で具体的に開示される態様に該当する。
<Comparative Example 2>
Instead of a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm, a color filter was produced according to the same procedure as in Example 1 except that ACCUGLASS (manufactured by Rasa Industrial Co., Ltd.) was used. Peeling evaluation was performed.
Note that Comparative Example 2 corresponds to the aspect specifically disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000059

 
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000059

 
 
 上記表1中、「分散液量」は、硬化膜形成用組成物中に加えられる金属酸化物微粒子分散液(分散組成物)の質量部を意図する。
 「重合性化合物」欄の「量」欄は、硬化膜形成用組成物中に加えられる重合性化合物の質量部を意図する。
 「バインダーポリマー」欄の「量」欄は、硬化膜形成用組成物中に加えられるバインダーポリマーの質量部を意図する。
 「界面活性剤」欄の「量」欄は、硬化膜形成用組成物中に加えられる界面活性剤の質量部を意図する。
 「PGMEA量」欄は、硬化膜形成用組成物中に加えられるプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)の質量部を意図する。
 「金属酸化物含有量」欄は、硬化膜中における金属酸化物粒子の含有量(質量%:wt%)を意図する。
 「剥がれ数」欄は、剥がれ欠陥数を意図する。
 表1中、DPHAは、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(日本化薬(株)社製)を意味する。
 表1中、OXE-01はBASF社製の開始剤である。
In Table 1 above, “dispersion amount” means the mass part of the metal oxide fine particle dispersion (dispersion composition) added to the composition for forming a cured film.
The “Amount” column in the “Polymerizable compound” column intends parts by mass of the polymerizable compound added to the cured film forming composition.
The “amount” column in the “binder polymer” column intends a part by mass of the binder polymer added to the composition for forming a cured film.
The “Amount” column in the “Surfactant” column intends a mass part of the surfactant added to the composition for forming a cured film.
The “PGMEA amount” column intends parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA) added to the composition for forming a cured film.
The “metal oxide content” column intends the content (mass%: wt%) of metal oxide particles in the cured film.
The “number of peeling” column intends the number of peeling defects.
In Table 1, DPHA means dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
In Table 1, OX-01 is an initiator manufactured by BASF.
 表1に示すように、本発明の製造方法で得られたカラーフィルタにおいては、レジストパターンの剥離後のパターン剥がれが少なく良好であった。
 なかでも、実施例1と10との比較より、金属酸化物粒子として酸化チタンを使用した場合、よりパターン剥がれが少なくなることが確認された。
 また、実施例1~8の比較より、硬化膜中における金属酸化物粒子の含有量が、硬化膜全質量に対して、50質量%以上77質量%以下である場合(実施例1~3の場合)、よりパターン剥がれが少なくなることが確認された。
 また、実施例1と9との比較より、上述した一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物を使用した場合、よりパターン剥がれが少なくなることが確認された。
 また、実施例1と11との比較より、重合性化合物として分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物を使用した場合、よりパターン剥がれが少なくなることが確認された。
As shown in Table 1, the color filter obtained by the production method of the present invention was good with little pattern peeling after peeling of the resist pattern.
In particular, it was confirmed from the comparison between Examples 1 and 10 that when titanium oxide was used as the metal oxide particles, pattern peeling was further reduced.
Further, from the comparison of Examples 1 to 8, when the content of the metal oxide particles in the cured film is 50% by mass or more and 77% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the cured film (Examples 1 to 3). In the case), it was confirmed that pattern peeling was further reduced.
Moreover, it was confirmed from the comparison with Example 1 and 9 that pattern peeling decreases more when the high molecular compound represented by General formula (1) mentioned above is used.
Further, from comparison between Examples 1 and 11, it was confirmed that when a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule was used as the polymerizable compound, pattern peeling was further reduced.
 一方、硬化膜を設けなかった比較例1、及び、特許文献1に具体的に開示されている比較例2では、パターン剥がれが多く、効果が劣っていた。 On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1 in which a cured film was not provided and in Comparative Example 2 specifically disclosed in Patent Document 1, pattern peeling was large and the effect was inferior.
 1…固体撮像装置,1a…基板(支持体),2…半導体基板,3…固体撮像素子,4…転送チャネル,5…転送電極,6…BPSG膜,7…層内レンズ,8…カラーフィルタ,9…マイクロレンズ,10…平坦化層,20…硬化膜,21…着色層,22…フォトレジスト層,24…レジストパターン,26…硬化膜露出部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Solid-state imaging device, 1a ... Board | substrate (support body), 2 ... Semiconductor substrate, 3 ... Solid-state image sensor, 4 ... Transfer channel, 5 ... Transfer electrode, 6 ... BPSG film | membrane, 7 ... In-layer lens, 8 ... Color filter , 9 ... Microlens, 10 ... Flattened layer, 20 ... Cured film, 21 ... Colored layer, 22 ... Photoresist layer, 24 ... Resist pattern, 26 ... Exposed portion of cured film

Claims (6)

  1.  支持体上に、一次粒子径が1nm~100nmの金属酸化物粒子を含有する硬化膜を形成する硬化膜形成工程と、
     前記硬化膜上に、着色層を形成する着色層形成工程と、
     前記着色層上に、フォトレジスト層を形成するフォトレジスト層形成工程と、
     前記フォトレジスト層をパターン様に除去することにより、前記着色層上にレジストパターンを形成するパターン形成工程と、
     前記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして、エッチングガスを用いたドライエッチング法によって着色層をエッチングするエッチング工程と、
     前記エッチング工程後に残存する前記レジストパターンを除去するレジストパターン除去工程と、を含むことを特徴とするカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    A cured film forming step of forming a cured film containing metal oxide particles having a primary particle diameter of 1 nm to 100 nm on a support;
    A colored layer forming step of forming a colored layer on the cured film;
    A photoresist layer forming step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
    A pattern forming step of forming a resist pattern on the colored layer by removing the photoresist layer in a pattern-like manner;
    Etching process using the resist pattern as an etching mask and etching the colored layer by a dry etching method using an etching gas;
    And a resist pattern removing step of removing the resist pattern remaining after the etching step.
  2.  前記硬化膜中における前記金属酸化物粒子の含有量が、前記硬化膜全質量に対して、50質量%以上77質量%以下である、請求項1に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 The method for producing a color filter according to claim 1, wherein the content of the metal oxide particles in the cured film is 50% by mass or more and 77% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the cured film.
  3.  前記金属酸化物粒子が、二酸化チタン及び酸化ジルコニウムからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、請求項1又は2に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 The method for producing a color filter according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the metal oxide particles are at least one selected from the group consisting of titanium dioxide and zirconium oxide.
  4.  前記硬化膜の厚さが5nmから500nmである、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 The method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the cured film has a thickness of 5 nm to 500 nm.
  5.  前記硬化膜が、重量平均分子量10000以下の下記一般式(1)で表される高分子化合物(A)を含有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (一般式(1)中、R1は、(m+n)価の連結基を表す。R2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。A1は、炭化水素基、酸性基、ウレア基、ウレタン基、配位性酸素原子を有する基、塩基性窒素原子を有する基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、アルキルアミノカルボニル基、カルボン酸塩基、スルホンアミド基、複素環基、イミド基、アルコキシシリル基、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基及び水酸基からなる群から選択される基を少なくとも1種有する1価の置換基を表す。n個のA1及びR2は、それぞれ同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
     mは8以下の正の数、nは1~9を表し、m+nは3~10を満たす。
     P1はポリマー鎖を表す。m個のP1は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。)
    The method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the cured film contains a polymer compound (A) represented by the following general formula (1) having a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (In general formula (1), R 1 represents a (m + n) -valent linking group. R 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. A 1 represents a hydrocarbon group, an acidic group, or a urea group. A urethane group, a group having a coordinating oxygen atom, a group having a basic nitrogen atom, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, an alkylaminocarbonyl group, a carboxylate group, a sulfonamide group, a heterocyclic group, an imide group, an alkoxysilyl group, Represents a monovalent substituent having at least one group selected from the group consisting of an epoxy group, an isocyanate group and a hydroxyl group, wherein n A 1 and R 2 may be the same or different; .
    m represents a positive number of 8 or less, n represents 1 to 9, and m + n satisfies 3 to 10.
    P 1 represents a polymer chain. The m P 1 may be the same or different. )
  6.  前記硬化膜形成工程が、前記金属酸化物粒子と分子内に2個以上のエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物とを少なくとも含む硬化膜形成用組成物を用いて硬化膜を形成する工程である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法。 The cured film forming step is a step of forming a cured film using a composition for forming a cured film including at least the metal oxide particles and a compound having two or more epoxy groups or oxetanyl groups in the molecule. The method for producing a color filter according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
PCT/JP2014/050676 2013-01-18 2014-01-16 Method for producing color filter WO2014112556A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020157018152A KR101678473B1 (en) 2013-01-18 2014-01-16 Method for producing color filter

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013007220 2013-01-18
JP2013-007220 2013-12-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014112556A1 true WO2014112556A1 (en) 2014-07-24

Family

ID=51209645

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/050676 WO2014112556A1 (en) 2013-01-18 2014-01-16 Method for producing color filter

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP5977770B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101678473B1 (en)
TW (1) TW201435400A (en)
WO (1) WO2014112556A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105334696A (en) * 2015-12-15 2016-02-17 苏州晶鼎鑫光电科技有限公司 Nanometer mask method for manufacturing integrated multi-channel optical filter
US9428328B2 (en) 2011-09-01 2016-08-30 2266170 Ontario Inc. Beverage capsule
US9428329B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2016-08-30 2266170 Ontario Inc. System for making capsule containing a dosing agent
US10154752B2 (en) 2013-05-23 2018-12-18 2266170 Ontario Inc. Capsule housing
US10314319B2 (en) 2013-11-20 2019-06-11 2266170 Ontario Inc. Method and apparatus for accelerated or controlled degassing of roasted coffee

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102022389B1 (en) * 2019-01-31 2019-09-18 (주)이노시아 Method of forming solid pattern for lens cover using high refractive index material

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007011324A (en) * 2005-06-03 2007-01-18 Fujifilm Holdings Corp Method of manufacturing color filter, color filter, and image recording material
JP2009079148A (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-04-16 Fujifilm Corp Processed pigment, pigment-dispersed composition, colored photosensitive composition, color filter, liquid crystal display element, and solid image pickup element
JP2012251125A (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-12-20 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition using the same, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element
JP2012255148A (en) * 2011-05-18 2012-12-27 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state image sensing device using the same, method for manufacturing transparent film, method for manufacturing microlens and method for manufacturing solid-state image sensing device
WO2014034815A1 (en) * 2012-08-31 2014-03-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Dispersion composition, and curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element using same

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2006092975A (en) * 2004-09-24 2006-04-06 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Color filter substrate for organic electroluminescent element
JP2008241744A (en) 2007-03-23 2008-10-09 Fujifilm Corp Method of manufacturing color filter
JP2009103746A (en) * 2007-10-19 2009-05-14 Fujifilm Corp Color filter, its manufacturing method, and solid-state imaging device
JP5562591B2 (en) * 2009-07-31 2014-07-30 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, color filter and method for producing the same
JP5765059B2 (en) * 2010-08-16 2015-08-19 Jsr株式会社 Colored composition, method for producing colored composition, colored pattern, color filter, color display element, and method for producing color filter

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007011324A (en) * 2005-06-03 2007-01-18 Fujifilm Holdings Corp Method of manufacturing color filter, color filter, and image recording material
JP2009079148A (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-04-16 Fujifilm Corp Processed pigment, pigment-dispersed composition, colored photosensitive composition, color filter, liquid crystal display element, and solid image pickup element
JP2012251125A (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-12-20 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition using the same, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element
JP2012255148A (en) * 2011-05-18 2012-12-27 Fujifilm Corp Dispersion composition, curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state image sensing device using the same, method for manufacturing transparent film, method for manufacturing microlens and method for manufacturing solid-state image sensing device
WO2014034815A1 (en) * 2012-08-31 2014-03-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Dispersion composition, and curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element using same

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9428328B2 (en) 2011-09-01 2016-08-30 2266170 Ontario Inc. Beverage capsule
US10154752B2 (en) 2013-05-23 2018-12-18 2266170 Ontario Inc. Capsule housing
US9428329B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2016-08-30 2266170 Ontario Inc. System for making capsule containing a dosing agent
US10611507B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2020-04-07 2266170 Ontario Inc. Capsule with control member
US10314319B2 (en) 2013-11-20 2019-06-11 2266170 Ontario Inc. Method and apparatus for accelerated or controlled degassing of roasted coffee
CN105334696A (en) * 2015-12-15 2016-02-17 苏州晶鼎鑫光电科技有限公司 Nanometer mask method for manufacturing integrated multi-channel optical filter

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201435400A (en) 2014-09-16
JP5977770B2 (en) 2016-08-24
JP2014157351A (en) 2014-08-28
KR20150094687A (en) 2015-08-19
KR101678473B1 (en) 2016-11-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6162165B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, organic electroluminescence device, pigment and method for producing pigment
KR101659826B1 (en) Dispersion composition, and curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element using same
JP6339208B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6336092B2 (en) Composition, cured film, pattern forming method, color filter, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6082705B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR101651160B1 (en) Dispersion composition, and curable composition, transparent film, microlens and solid-state imaging element using same
JP5977770B2 (en) Manufacturing method of color filter
WO2015115414A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, manufacturing method for color filter, solid state imaging element, and image display device
JP6251067B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2015016243A1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state image pickup device, and image display device
JP5934682B2 (en) Curable composition for forming microlenses or undercoat film for color filter, transparent film, microlens, solid-state imaging device, and method for producing curable composition
JP6279745B2 (en) COLORING COMPOSITION, COLOR FILTER, PATTERN FORMING METHOD, COLOR FILTER MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND DYE MULTIMER MANUFACTURING METHOD
JPWO2017086245A1 (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer
JP6574849B2 (en) Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP5894944B2 (en) Compound and dispersion composition
WO2015115413A1 (en) Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14740783

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20157018152

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14740783

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1